Home

Vendor Technical Guide Zyxel NBG4604

1. 147 TE WIE r 147 15 2 What You Can DO escono a oco benc voee es oco aec oae Oc o BOR ont 147 15 3 IP Staic Route SHOR 1seaseeitocece peso Forediueb ge tede abe b Oc AKEEUI QUE qu k pA OT e EQ Lu ME Ord XE MOON CER URTE 148 15 3 1 Sae Route Selup Sry ceicccuppemcecne e Sese uei cce oim sucre taper aed ee eae ee 149 Chapter 16 BandwidIh ManageinigliLa uaa ai kxa baia ERAI a A 1 ARI ANKEE A RRER AMA RR nannaa KU ARR TOM UA BU ERA KIA FRA 151 y Ee 1 eR ET 151 15 2 What Yol CSI DIO duuncacece recettes E oveesaer Fesecc oa a ka ree FERA es den E oosce cde rus ERA cuE 151 TES What Tou Nead TORIO rennin R a A ARE 152 jc ur Bender ETT 152 jeg pega e M M 153 Ju NL ICE NC Tt E AE TAE tduld na N AE T dubesuenicnburbasd 156 16 5 2 User Defined Service Rule Configuration o eecceeecceeseseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeteeeteeneeees 156 16 5 3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services ssessssssseeeees 157 16 5 4 Services and Port NUMDETS ecciesia bna dana nnd ak Rada anna 158 Chapter 17 u iuj du n 159 yer noo RR 159 T2528 What o ESL DIS aus ieeddiSus iex Eb erue DaradkbgsL re eO ERE Pax INE ag E ROSE k dac BK exi tU Fra UEE RR 159 12 What You Need ED RITE 160 17 3 1 Remote Management LIMMALGNS rtr rmn a e as 160 1723 2 Remate Management and INT uesiauee ern edaee cure da ise tmc kd
2. X 113 BHGP SREE anaa A m TOM 117 Network Address Translation NAT lt siescdasiiniednemenlesnsesneiacatdcesiieddiemanledbbbeennigacennieddnnmmdiecitinas 123 BP im 131 dj cR M MET 135 ROA IIL PRENG Suse ciqast ee dap pU pre ERESPnEVUBED POL UD osea pu dum PR VU do baupx RUD E eraat tp ego QU ER EPO LUE 143 MERLO a a A A ames He N ieee 147 EE A E es PRT PEN TEE T E E E E E T E E LT 151 Remote Management e oian aA AS 159 Univera Punand Play UPOP ocsi 171 UIS MENTO LE o TA E 179 LOGS p 185 o T 189 copas oH Me 195 EP m 199 Miis lis ue ee reer er er erent cern et rr errr per renner Tecer ren rare cree toeer errr are tr 201 mus pere wp ecc E 209 NBG4604 User s Guide 9 Contents Overview NBG4604 User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Guide A XA 3 posce mS soscaire euss diaa aia aaa ediuar 6 c lik i1 a eee ee EOE E aa a nee a 8 geri X 9 Table e 11 Part l Users rri mE E 19 Chapter 1 TEP OCILICTI OR DR raaa 21 NES 4 uM 21 rl each
3. ssssessesssseeeeeeenrnene nennen 265 Appendix G Legal Information cased Ib res cece EDU dE 283 MENUS e M 287 NBG4604 User s Guide Table of Contents NBG4604 User s Guide PART I User s Guide Introduction 1 1 Overview This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG4604 The NBG4604 extends the range of your existing wired network without additional wiring providing easy network access to mobile users You can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802 11b g n compatible devices A range of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available for secure Internet computing 1 2 Applications Your can create the following networks using the NBG4604 Wired You can connect network devices via the Ethernet ports of the NBG4604 so that they can communicate with each other and access the Internet Wireless Wireless clients can connect to the NBG4604 to access network resources WAN Connect to a broadband modem router for Internet access Figure 1 NBG4604 Network WLAN NBG4604 User s Guide 2 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 Ways to Manage the NBG4604 Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG4604 WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup You can use the WPS button or the WPS section of the Web Configurator to set up a wireless network with your ZyXEL Device Web Configurator This is recomm
4. NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs 20 5 Log Settings Screen Use this screen to send copies of the NBG4604 syslog files to a dedicated syslog server For information on setting up a syslog server consult the documentation that came with your syslog server product Click Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings to open this screen Figure 110 Maintenance Logs Log Settings Log Settings Syslog Logging Cl active Syslog Server IP Address The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable syslog logging on this device Syslog Server IP Enter the IP address of the syslog server to receive syslogs from this Address device Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide 187 Chapter 20 Logs 188 NBG4604 User s Guide Tools 21 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware upload or save backup configuration files and restart the NBG4604 21 2 What You Can Do Use the Firmware screen Section 21 3 on page 189 to upload firmware to your NBG4604 Use the Configuration screen Section 21 4 on page 192 to view information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration Use the Restart screen
5. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Security gt Firewall gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall The NBG4604 performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again 13 5 The Access Control Rule Screen Click Firewall gt Access Control Rule to display the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured access control rules Figure 78 Firewall gt Access Control Rule Access Control Rule Application Rules Summary Packet Direction ANTI To A zi es Name ec Modify RQARARARARR EP Eb E E E E E Eb ED B my o q Note Default action of WAN to WAN access control rule is block NBG4604 User s Guide 1 37 Chapter 13 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Firewall Access Control Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Application Rules Summary Packet This displays the direction of traffic WAN to WAN to which this rule Direction applies The NBG4604 stops computers on the WAN from managing the NBG4604 or using the NBG4604 as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN This is your firewall rule number The ordering of your rules is important
6. eeeseeseeessss 130 Chapter 12 ci ji me 131 PENES RT T mU NIU IM UUER 131 Taa IT YO CAN DO 5 Sects oie hoes Se ee Gus Open pdias aee LUE Dane podia So eda boca SEE EAE 131 12 2 What You Need To MGW scuncuieraniinr initin aac abe dan ad o p CR o ea nes 131 125 5 1 DDNS VOR runde ti Mibbee qu iube ef dedo ai 131 Tad Dye DNS SOGBIN cU 132 Chapter 13 iir tem Cn 135 jpzre 0 5 MUN EP CES eer toS 135 T2 VOD PONE COS DID uo aeo tiia Ee Ee EN b Mecsas bic ace onm ER Er do db Pisd mE 136 13 3 What Youn Nest To KNOW ciens dern d POOR Ra tr Rer Gu Gab UR HM ab A 136 15 31 About Wis MECHO04 Firewall 15 attt dli a Sev adea he x nonae bath Qaa bp exi tes toes 136 p SEDI zit Eom 137 13 5 The Access Control Rule DOIBB saisi aie exi saath Rn b nb di kac gas Soci ke de Aa 137 15 5 1 Add Edit an ACL Rule 2 0 d iriedee in E rain ise Et I Sec tae tient vod E ee 139 129b SHIVIEBE DEBE aisina aaa Os ae o een pia o cba en 140 Chapter 14 der i4 Ii TEE m 143 NBG4604 User s Guide Table of Contents j ue M 143 peA e EE E mcm 143 eke Wheat You Need Tor KNOW rnanehna aa a rir 143 T9553 T Gontent Filtering PTOUIGS siinne a NA 143 Taa For ocon aiaa a 144 TAS echmca REIBreNOG sonrakine neck EE EEE AEEA can RE 145 14 5 1 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking sssssseeeeee 145 Chapter 15 7 9HA O
7. The NBG4604 can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a network 25 1 Wall mounting Instructions Complete the following steps to hang your NBG4604 on a wall Select a position free of obstructions on a sturdy wall 2 Drill two holes for the screws Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws NBG4604 User s Guide 2n Chapter 25 Product Specifications 3 Do not insert the screws all the way into the wall Leave a small gap of about 0 5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the NBG4604 with the connection cables 5 Align the holes on the back of the NBG4604 with the screws on the wall Hang the NBG4604 on the screws Figure 126 Wall mounting Example The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm Figure 127 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 4 22 0 1 2 01 2 16 30 0 2 0 30 0 2 0 212 NBG4604 User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks P addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subn
8. STEP 2 STEP 3 fa Internet Configuration My WAN IP Address My WAN IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address First DNS Server Second DNS Server The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP Address Assignment My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field The WAN IP address should be in the same subnet as your DSL Cable modem or router My WAN IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask in this field Mask Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field System DNS Server Address Assignment if applicable DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG4604 uses a system DNS server in the order you specify here to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server First DNS Server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the fields provided Second DNS Server If you do not configure a system DNS server you must use IP addresses when configuring DDNS and the time server Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving NBG4604 User s Guide st Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 4
9. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Network gt LAN gt IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get from DHCP Select this to have your NBG4604 receive its IP address automatically Server from a DHCP server User Defined LAN Select this to manually enter the IP address and Subnet Mask as they IP were provided to you by your network administrator IP Address Type the IP address of your NBG4604 in dotted decimal notation 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP Mask address Your NBG4604 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4604 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 9 LAN NBG4604 User s Guide DHCP Server 10 1 Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG4604 s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the NBG4604 provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 10 2 What You Can Do Use the
10. 2 This can happen when you fail to log out properly from your last session Try logging in again after 5 minutes 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4604 4 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 24 4 on page 205 24 3 Internet Access cannot access the Internet 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP Go to Network gt Wireless LAN gt General gt WDS and check if the NBG4604 is set to bridge mode Select Disable and try to connect to the Internet again 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again 5 Goto Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General Check your System Operation Mode setting Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network 6 If the problem continues contact your ISP cannot access the Internet anymore had access to the Internet with the
11. Appendix G Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect
12. Services Selec Ihe services running on pour nalak that lolemeluseis can x ana Figure 101 Service Settings Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 158 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 132 168 1 1 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service 144 Cancel Note When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 5 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray Figure 102 System Tray Icon J Internet Connection is now connected Click here for more information NBG4604 User s Guide 1 75 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 18 5 2 Web Configurator Easy Access 176 Internet Connection Status qu General Intemet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer w 3 Packets Sent 8 618 Received 5 943 746 Close Follow the steps below to access the Web Configurator Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections Internet Connection Status 6 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 103 With UPnP you
13. Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 7 Quality of Service QoS Screen The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service such as e mail VoIP or FTP a priority level Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS The following screen appears Figure 49 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS QoS Setup WMM QoS Policy Application Priority OOO Name Service DestPort Priority Modify T 907 e ce w oO m amp jo v GG GG G GR GA GR GR C GR GR GL GR EH EM Ed ED EH EP ed ed EP ED E ED ed Eb ED o oj ojojoj ojojojojojojojoljo jo jo Apply NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Network Wireless LAN QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION WMM QoS Policy Select Default to have the NBG4604 automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends WMM QoS Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service gives high priority to voice and video which makes them run more smoothly Select Application Priority from the drop down list box to display a table of application names services ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM QoS Policy This is the number of an in
14. Figure 82 Example of Static Routing Topology N1 N2 N3 15 2 What You Can Do Use the IP Static Route screen Section 15 3 on page 148 to view existing static route rules Use the Static Route Setup screen Section 15 3 1 on page 149 to add or edit a static route rule NBG4604 User s Guide 1 47 Chapter 15 Static Route 15 3 IP Static Route Screen Use this screen to view existing static route rules Click Management gt Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen The following screen displays Figure 83 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route IP Static Route Static Route Setup one cine estnaton tatenay Nob The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an individual static route The first entry is for the default route and not editable Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Active This icon is turned on when this static route is active Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Static Route Setup screen to enable the static route Clear the checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gate
15. We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary Gen eral Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free pro grams enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of t
16. Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 17 5 The Telnet Screen You can use Telnet to access the NBG4604 s command line interface Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come Click Management gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet tab to display the screen as shown Figure 90 Management gt Remote Management gt Telnet TELNET TELNET Server Port 23 Server Access Lan J LAN LAN amp WAN Disable Secured Client IP Address amp all C Selected Note You may also need to create a Firewall rule Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Management Remote Management Telnet LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG4604 using this service Secured Client A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate IP Addess with the NBG4604 using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG4604 using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address tha
17. EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes uclibc 0 9 29 software under LGPL license GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Pub NBG4604 User s Guide 271 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 272 lic Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in
18. Add Edit Access Control Rule setup Active Rule Name Cz Source IP Address rooo w booo Service List User defined Protocol Type Tcr Port Range i M 1 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Access Control Rule Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Access Control Rul e setup Select Protocol Active Select the check box to enable the rule Clear the check box to disable the rule Rule Name Enter a descriptive name for the rule Source IP Enter the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this rule Address applies Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any Service List Select the service to which this rule applies from the drop down list box Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop down list box If you want to configure a customized protocol select Specific Protocol Protocol Type Choose the IP port Both TCP or UDP that defines your customized port from the drop down list box Port Range Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall 13 6 Services Screen If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG4604
19. Bandwidth Management UPnP 0 1 56 2009 01 01 00 02 02 5 87 60 Enable Disable Enable DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen Table 2 Status Screen Icon Key ICON DESCRIPTION g Click this icon to open the setup wizard Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information Click this icon at any time to exit the Web Configurator Refresh Interval seconds zl Select a number of seconds or None from the drop down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen Router Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information System Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created WAN Information MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the WAN port s IP address IP Subnet M
20. C You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the cov ered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms NBG4604 User s Guide 277 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 278 You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the
21. LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This displays Configured when the NBG4604 has connected to a wireless network using WPS or when Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there are no wireless or wireless security changes on the NBG4604 or you click Release_ Configuration to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings Release Configuration Apply This button is only available when the WPS status displays Configured Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the NBG4604 Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Refresh Click Refresh to get this screen information afresh 7 9 WPS Station Screen Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station tab Note Note After you click Push Button on this screen you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes To add the second wireless station you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes Figure 52 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Station q Allow Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS st
22. March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 19 System Table 68 Maintenance System Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Last Sunday October and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 19 System NBG4604 User s Guide Logs 20 1 Overview This chapter contai
23. My IP Subnet Mask l WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP DNS Servers From ISP m From ISP m First DNS Server Second DNS Server WAN MAC Address e Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address p 0 0 0 C set WAN MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 40 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet The NBG4604 supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time Connection Type To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP NBG4604 User s Guide a PPTP connection Chapter 8 WAN Table 40 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Type the password associated with the User Name above Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you
24. Section 21 5 on page 194 to have the NBG4604 reboot 21 3 Firmware Upload Screen Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension e g NBG4604 bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools Click Maintenance Tools Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4604 Figure 111 Maintenance Tools Firmware Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware browse to the location of the binary bin upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary bin file In some cases you may need to reconfigure File Path Browse Upload The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Maintenance gt Tools gt Firmware LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Note Do not turn off the NBG4604
25. Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address OK 3 Cancel f you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain I P address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list f you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen 4 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 155 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS ba Network Configuration File Profile Help 6589 New Edit Copy Delete Devices Hardware DNS Hosts You may configure the system s hostname domain name servers and search domain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path Active Profile Common modified NBG4604 User s Guide 245 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 5 Click the Devices tab 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens Figure 156 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate redhat config network You have made some changes in your conf
26. Table 58 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Enable Select this check box to have the NBG4604 apply this bandwidth management rule Service This is the name of the service You can also enter the name up to 10 keyboard characters of a service you want to add in the priority queue for example Messenger Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High or Low Specific Port This displays the port s assigned to the service You can also specify the port s to services to which you want to allocate bandwidth Choose either Both TCP or UDP in the drop down menu and enter the port or range of ports in the provided boxes Note If you are entering a specific port and not a range of ports you can either leave the second port field blank or enter the same port number again Bandwidth Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific Allocation protocols on an IP or IP range This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Enable Select this check box to have the NBG4604 apply this bandwidth management rule LAN IP Range This displays the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies Direction These read only labels represent uplink or downlink traffic To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from
27. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s f you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged This CPE is indoor use only Utilisation int rieure exclusivement Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE bi stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical C and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately 8 NBG4604 User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview d 1c Mem 19 nigri T 21 Hiit DO NN NU E UU T LU T MTM 25 The Web ATTN Ae E 27 SOHO VOLES rii mere ete perta i b poda a evr E 39 PP MOUE MR ERTRER E ypcea dents wade xometieaiucede A E eee none i 55 Hun e 63 lii M AO I OOK CYCO XX 75 DUrn o LAN e 77 DUAL NERO NS EU T E UU NU TN 101 EF m
28. You may not convey a cov ered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with spe cific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law 12 No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Pro gram the only way you could sa
29. an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the NBG4604 exists Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG4604 when unsupported ports are probed You can also use this screen to enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them Click Security gt Firewall gt Services The screen appears as shown next Figure 80 Security gt Firewall gt Services ICMP Respond to Ping on I Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Services LAN vj Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Security Firewall Services LABEL ICMP DESCRIPTION Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Respond to Ping on The NBG4604 will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to all incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Select t
30. gt Wireless LAN gt WPS screen System Status System Up Time This is the total time the NBG4604 has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG4604 s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG4604 s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 100 the NBG4604 is running at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4604 is using Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG4604 port types The port types are LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN port this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode Table 19 Status Screen AP Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled Summary Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Use this screen to
31. provision ally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the vio lation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 9 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of
32. the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circum stances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest valid ity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distrib uted through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be si
33. 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake If the RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Note Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy 252 NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fr
34. 103 P Address 115 125 IP address 50 dynamic IP Pool 118 L LAN 113 P pool setup 114 LAN overview 113 LAN setup 113 LAN TCP IP 114 Language 199 Link type 33 57 288 NBG4604 User s Guide Index local user database 79 and encryption 80 Local Area Network 113 Log 186 MAC 87 MAC address 79 103 cloning 52 103 MAC address filter 79 MAC address filtering 87 MAC filter 87 Management Information Base MIB 164 managing the device good habits 22 using the Web Configurator See Web Configurator using the WPS See WPS MBSSID 21 Media access control 87 Memory usage 32 57 Metric 149 mode 21 Multicast 103 IGMP 103 N NAT 123 124 167 221 how it works 123 overview 123 routers 167 see also Network Address Translation NAT traversal 171 Navigation Panel 33 58 navigation panel 33 58 NetBIOS 104 see also Network Basic Input Output System 104 Network Address Translation 123 124 O Operating Channel 32 57 operating mode 21 P P2P 158 peer to peer 158 Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 46 106 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 47 108 Pool Size 118 Port forwarding 125 default server 125 local server 125 port speed 33 58 Power Specification 209 PPPoE 46 106 benefits 46 dial up connection see also Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 46 PPTP 47 108 see also Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 47 Preamble Mode 253 product registration 286 Q Quality
35. 2 Vv www Low v 3 Vv TELNET 5 Vv VoIP SIP 6 Vv BitTorrent tow z 7 Iv Gaming Low x oa 5 C m exp T T ee 2 7 exp I Click Enable for the Vol P SI P service and set priority to High Do the same for E mail For the rest of the applications click Enable if you need these services and set the priority to Low Note You can also leave the Enable field blank for the rest of the applications In doing so the NBG4604 does not apply bandwidth management to these services 6 3 2 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Custom Application Aside from the VOIP and e mail services you need to set the priority for MSN Messenger To do this add the service in the Priority Queue table of the Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced screen Figure 39 Tutorial Adding MSN Messenger to Priority Queue Priority Queue T iv FTP Low x 2 iv www Low x 3 iv TELNET Low x 4 7 E Mail High gt 5 Iv VoIP SIP High z 6 Iv BitTorrent Low z v Gaming 8 10 r High z Both alll 11 O High z Both alll 12 O High x Both zl NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials To add the MSN Messenger service in the Priority Queue 1 Click Enable in one of the fields for additional services 2 Add MSN as the service name 3 Setthe priority for this to High 4 Forth
36. 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 29 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 80 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Br
37. 21 Ss em EIN T 21 1 3 Ways to Manage the NBGAGUA 1i stone a d a aba org eben obe ada a Ra abt 22 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the NBOGASSU04 1 essaie aded eene nua tractans cri 22 jh sr 22 Chapter 2 The WPS d 25 ZAEA OI SENIUM 25 Chapter 3 The Wep ConfhigUratOF 27 SEON O oi A 27 2e LOO ACO a T apod onbPcaf Sa Poetas Sadapdf Cop bcd piat aa ina E IA 27 3 9 Terctimepip m uspeag ici er t T 28 xc lieu tollam 30 3 4 1 Procedure to Use the Reset Buttery 2a ane tetas nana npn Bunk gerens 30 25 Navigating the Web CORIDUESEIQF asssiisiiaseecce acuto PYu To aet epe eate E Era Petro MER Pet dua 30 3 6 stalus Screen Router MOON eis retis pureza a po a Kr ue aa pcd naL RA der d 30 ESI Oro MN rc TTE N 33 26 2 SUMMA DACP TADE M a a aD A N Ea 35 A523 umida Packe SIANSHCS uude bie as qu td a da ERR ees 36 2 6 4 Summary WLAN Station GESTUS qassteecstsoser qae bu be duda ani ek EXIGERE FE eA ARR SO eiai eriin 37 NBG4604 User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 4 P il Ej Pe 39 row iris dori o MANET EE a i 39 4 2 Connection Wizard STEP 1 System Informallole 1 rectore ertet ettari 40 SUE NESCIT UH IS D NT TET 40 22 2 Bomam DOSE icooeisddtteH Uere NUdbee DU NP Ra 41 45 Connection Wizard STEP 2 Wireless LAB 1 read rint pati abd nk a ln ei
38. 5 AP Mode See Chapter 19 on page 179 for information on configuring your maintenance settings 5 5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode 1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG4604 2 The default IP address of the NBG4604 is 192 168 1 2 In this case your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 3 Click Start Run on your computer in Windows 4 Type cmd in the dialog box 5 Type ipconfig to show your computer s IP address If your computer s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix C on page 231 for information on changing your computer s IP address 6 After you ve set your computer s IP address open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type 192 168 1 2 as the web address in your web browser See Chapter 6 on page 63 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode NBG4604 User s Guide Tutorials 6 1 Overview This chapter provides tutorials for your NBG4604 as follows How to Connect to the Internet from an AP Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG4604 and Wireless Client Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG4604 Bandwidth Management for your Network 6 2 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP This section gives you an example of how to set up an access point AP and wireless client a notebook B i
39. 713 2 Kb TX bytes 1570 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost NBG4604 User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless stations A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an Ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 162 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network ua om ome m ua A C BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other Figure 163 Basic Service Set ESS An Extended Service Set E
40. 9 WAN MAC Address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Table 17 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses Choose an IP address 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 32 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway or default route 192 168 1 1 NBG4604 LAN IP This screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG4604 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to configuration file It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Figure 22 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAC Address STEP So aoe A i er ee ee fa Internet Configuration clone the computer s MAC address IP Address aan Set WAN MAC Address Minn The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 18 Wizard Step 3 WAN MAC Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Factory Default Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address Clone the Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the computer s MAC LAN whose MAC you are cloning It is advisable to clon
41. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggrega tion of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent cop ies and derivative works made from that copy This option i
42. General screen Section 10 4 on page 118 to enable the DHCP server Use the Advanced screen Section 10 5 on page 118 to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Use the Client List screen Section 10 6 on page 120 to view the current DHCP client information 10 3 What You Need To Know Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen Refer to Section 4 4 6 on page 49 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask Refer to the Section 4 4 7 on page 50 section for information on System DNS Servers NBG4604 User s Guide 11 7 Chapter 10 DHCP Server 10 4 General Screen Use this screen to enable the DHCP server Click Network gt DHCP Server The following screen displays Figure 67 Network DHCP Server General DHCP Setup M Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address fis2 168 1 33 Pool Size 2 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Network gt DHCP Server gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable DHCP Server Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual client
43. Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 31 Network Wireless LAN QoS Application Priority Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Dest Port This displays the port the selected service uses Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen 7 8 WPS Screen Use this screen to enable disable WPS view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS tab Figure 51 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS WPS Setup Enable WPS PIN Number 54403208 Generate WPS Status Status Configured Release configuration 802 11 Mode 802 11 b g n SSID ZyXEL NBG 417N Security Mo Security q Note If you enable WPS the UPnP service will be turned on automatically Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS LABEL DESCRIPTION WPS Setup Enable WPS Select this to enable the WPS feature PIN Number This displays a PIN number last time system generated Click Generate to generate a new PIN number WPS Status NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 32 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS
44. Guide 233 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab f you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS f you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in Figure 141 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties 3 24 xl Bindings Advanced NetBloS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address Domain Suffix Search Order Add Remove Cancel 4 Click the Gateway tab f you do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways f you have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Sett
45. IP address of the computer that sent the request After that computer s connection for that service closes another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application To change your NBG4604 s trigger port settings click Network gt NAT gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Note Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port range at a time Figure 73 Network NAT Advanced Port Triggering Rules pM 7S Start Port End Port Start Port End Port 1 DOO i m __ __ 2 jJ __ __ __ 3 __ __ __ Do D 4 1 __ az __ 5 a Ltt __ __ 6 o __ 7j __ 7 NENNEN o __ __ 8 DO L __ _ 9 fe __ __ o 10 a __ Em Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Network NAT Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number read only Name Type a unique name up to 15 characters for identification purposes All characters are permitted including spaces Incoming Incoming is a port or a range of ports that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service The NBG4604 forwards the traffic with t
46. Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE iri eu rac 8 bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 224 2 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216 2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 28 2 254 29 bits 255 255 255 2 3 bits 23 2 6 48 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 79 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET ALTERNATIVE LAST OCTET LAST OCTET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 12 25 1000 0000 128 8 255 255 255 19 26 1100 0000 192 2 255 255 255 22 27 1110 0000 224 4 255 255 255 24 28 1111 0000 240 0 255 255 255 24 29 1111 1000 248 8 255 255 255 25 30 1111 1100 252 2 NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate
47. Mifare NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 2 Choose a language by clicking on the language s button The screen will update Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen Figure 10 Select a Language Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup Please choose the language you need cos Deutsch Mfp 3 Read the on screen information and click Next Figure 11 Welcome to the Connection Wizard Welcome to the ZyXEL Connection Wizard The connection wiz will wy ou through the most common configuration options This wizard has been broken down into t ps each of which may have multiple pages This wizard will take you through the following steps n Information Setup 4 2 Connection Wizard STEP 1 System Information System Information contains administrative and system related information 4 2 1 System Name System Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard To view or set your computer name in Windows right click over My Computer on your desktop then select Properties When the System Properties window opens select the Computer Name tab Figure 12 Computer Name System Restore Automatic Updates Computer Name Hardware Computer description Full computer name twpc13435 ZyXEL com Domain ZyXEL com To
48. OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL s AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT S PRICE BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM AGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCU MENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 10 Termin
49. OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN port NBG4604 User s Guide 231 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window Figure 139 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration Network LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y TCP IP gt 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and the
50. Op Mode General Router Ports are LAN 4 Ethernet LAN ports WLAN WAN LAN DHCP server is configurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 1 WAN IP is configurable n this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports The LAN Ethernet and WAN Ethernet ports have different IP addresses The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other devices on your local network The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192 168 1 1 You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings If you select Access Point the following pop up message window appears Figure 124 Maintenance Sys Op Mode General AP x A Ports are LAN 5 Ethernet LAN ports WLAN LAN DHCP server is disabled amp unconfigurable LAN IP is 192 168 1 2 WAN IP is unreachable n AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports including the port labeled WAN There is no WAN port The DHCP server on your device is disabled In AP mode there must be a device with a DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can allocate IP addresses The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192 168 1 2 NBG4604 User s Guide 1 97 Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode The following table describes the labels in the Gen
51. PSK Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Type from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII or 64 HEX characters You can set Key up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens You need to configure an authentication server to do this Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 Connection Wizard STEP 3 Internet Configuration The NBG4604 offers three Internet connection types They are Ethernet PPP over Ethernet or PPTP The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using If the wizard does not detect a connection type you must select one from the drop down list box Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select Figure 16 Wizard Step 3 ISP Parameters STEP T STEP 2 STEPS fa Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s connection settings Connection Type i rne E E PPP over Ethernet PPTP S ese o ex The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Wizard Step 3 ISP Parameters CONNECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION Ethernet Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet PPPoE Select the PPP
52. Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLI VE TCP 7000 A videoconferencing solution The UDP port number is specified in the UDP user application defined NBG4604 User s Guide Open Software Announcements End User License Agreement for NBG4604 WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNIN STALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyX
53. SNMP screen see Section 17 7 on page 163 to configure SNMP settings You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Use the ACS screen Section 17 8 on page 166 to configure set up the ACS server information on your NBG4604 17 3 What You Need To Know 17 3 1 17 3 2 17 3 3 To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field You may only have one remote management session running at a time Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens The IP address in the Secured Client I P Address field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the NBG4604 will disconnect the session immediately There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time There is a firewall rule that blocks it Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled Use the NBG4604 s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Use the NBG4604 s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The NBG4604 automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this
54. Trigger port forwarding 128 example 129 process 129 U Universal Plug and Play 171 application 172 UPnP 171 security issues 172 URL Keyword Blocking 145 Use Authentication 258 user authentication 79 local user database 79 RADIUS server 79 NBG4604 User s Guide Index User Name 133 V VPN 108 W WAN IP address assignment 49 WAN Wide Area Network 101 WAN advanced 111 WAN IP address 49 WAN IP address assignment 51 WAN MAC address 103 warranty 286 note 286 Web Configurator 22 how to access 28 Overview 27 Web configurator navigating 30 WEP Encryption 85 WEP encryption 84 WEP key 84 Wildcard 131 Wireless association list 37 wireless channel 206 wireless LAN 206 wireless LAN scheduling 95 Wireless LAN wizard 42 Wireless network basic guidelines 78 channel 78 encryption 80 example 77 MAC address filter 79 overview 77 security 78 SSID 78 Wireless security 78 overview 78 type 78 wireless security 206 Wireless tutorial 55 63 WPS 63 Wizard setup 39 complete 53 Internet connection 44 system information 40 wireless LAN 42 WLAN Interference 251 Security Parameters 260 World Wide Web 157 WPA compatible 80 WPA WPA2 257 WPS 22 WWW 92 157 X Xbox Live 158 NBG4604 User s Guide Index NBG4604 User s Guide
55. User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 134 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAG 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScript If pages of the Web Configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScript are allowed NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 135 Internet Options Security AE General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings F Fa O Intemet Localintranet Trusted sites Restricted sites MD This zone contains all Web sites you BE haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone 5 Medium Safe browsing and still
56. White Pines Software TCP UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation IPSEC TUNNEL Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix E Services Table 90 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is MULTI CAST used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e mail IMAPAS TCP 993 This is a more secure version of MAP4 that runs over SS
57. a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 129 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting ee NN C E ae a 4 fl D m ii E 0 i i B i B i It i i li a i i i WU gt J 192 168 1 0 24 a a Se mee eee m m ee ee RR RU OR UR UR WA You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either O or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 NBG4604 User s Guide 217 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B Figure 130 Subnetting Example After Subnetting fs uB 4 B o B lt gt M i f UN f Internet fi it fi fl f a A 7 ni 1 a an g 4 192 168 1 0 25 88192 168 1 128 25 8I 1 4 am mumamam mam PF uum oum um um um im um m In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 2
58. a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP Note The NBG4604 supports one PPTP server connection at any given time Figure 19 Wizard Step 3 PPTP Connection SSS STE STEPS fa Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s ISP connection settings Connection Type User Name Password Server IP Address Connection ID Name Get automatically from ISP Default Use fixed IP address My IP Address My IP Subnet Mask NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 13 Wizard Step 3 PPTP Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters fo r Internet Access Connection Type Select PPTP from the drop down list box To configure a PPTP client you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP Password Type the password associated with the User Name above PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection D Name Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field It must follow the
59. akon denda indenture ond bead e 105 DAL PPPOE ENCAD UON irinse ia aE baie xao E dm nda aane 106 BAS PPIP Encapsulation sioen ia 108 85 Advanced WAN Sy i sie icis EE De i RE e n S een or a o aT pen ER RAN 111 Chapter 9 ERN unu hdc MM ME MM dt iE DU E UE 113 ONES L4 d E ES OUT 113 92 Whal You Can D eon onde PH n EE eae E a uas het insund ERE eek iiA 113 ao What rou Ne To KNOW oriniai E a re EE bonc cH kx beum x Sas pa GER SUD ES RR 114 NBG4604 User s Guide 18 Table of Contents ESI Peel Slt u ases exnr eis ph data E E d a bo E wc C aat 114 Oe IP Wee UN oem iH ER OE TRA TP EROR DN 114 SALAD PES Ca eiii b Editi tux ur an cata Uaesas a hehe onte LRO SE c AE audes 115 Chapter 10 DHUP SOEI uina dp He ee EH REM cto a eee ee 117 HIE I MR LN EM TENERE 117 102 What Yu Can Do sana m US E EU 117 19 2 What You Nesd To ODE oessoteirids perivede Dua nde Ripe A 117 TOA General SOREN TIUS Um T 118 pecvuce sbcel mn 118 jh cme n4 EC IS PNE 120 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT ecce e Lciceeeeeeeere c e eene enun nans nana nana 123 HERO LI onto 123 ee Nhat Youn Can DO METTRE 124 Ta General e PETERE TET T 124 DES Asse Ib m 125 1125 NAT Advancod DOE o ric sect eee pr iar ce a pe Eo qs tu M ER p n Ro apa RR 128 115 1 Tugosr Port Forwarding Example es nsse oiii eet REED RUE Rt Ebr aSaR Pri gd ERU da tit a 129 11 5 2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports
60. and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for don t know the IP address of my NBG4604 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScript and Java enabled See Appendix B on page 223 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG4604 If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG4604 skip this step f there is a DHCP server on your network make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address See Section 7 3 on page 102 f there is no DHCP server on your network make sure your computer s IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG4604 See Section 7 3 on page 102 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the NBG4604 with the default IP address See Section 7 3 on page 102 6 If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions f your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a LAN ETHERNET port can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the NBG4604 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly The default password is 1234 This field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting
61. any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode program Copyright C year name of author This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the pro gram if necessary For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into pr
62. aosi gba eri aeu ada du d cacao dud dd d a 181 Chapter 20 v 185 UMEV n p 185 eus Wat TOU IS DIO ouais iotbiri dam cassp ste A den up tactu Pad Dese D aa o aa 185 e a Mhst ved eB TO EIDWE s oet Nap o ee quaPu tti Qd dqeb EU Side Qu QE QINQ D pNt QM uen H QI Qe GU UU QUU QU dU 185 ZU Vien LOU OC BRE coe tb eO TRU RE M TERMED De uM UD e b 186 Bum Egg SOLIDIS ORDIN peronie a OM idR da RET add Ra ERA araa R FLINT KU DR Dun 187 Chapter 21 TOG 189 a Een Pec E 189 zi IE YOU D S DO sus E E E en Gun ERE aii aad A ERE du EB Sareea GER UR 189 23 Firmuare Upload SCR BG deese eor aab skim dtes Gan eed Seuss APUD ERE Ree Uo dope PTvER See dS EOS 189 2rd eI SCPE siina EE ecce nnd a aaa va bel n Cote dana e 192 213 1 Bon CODICI UMOR siarkan inana i dada ROO DU Cadet radi a eb ark d ud ca deba a 192 212 Reslore Conngtra HON m 193 2135 3 Back to Fay DORUS sensan aesi i cres ivre atus pt E wA 194 L Ponar Sea ee itte im Teen eee te pean ty RE Eie deleti un Dco renner reenter rT rar ere eer DNE E 194 Chapter 22 itd o 195 2a Een V HL IT LIII TM 195 222 UE YOU COSE DI uuo epee rome reer eet rere eee rrr enn err ee d ani pA UR aU E rene tire 195 229 What VOU Neod 10 KNOW e 196 NBG4604 User s Guide Table of Co
63. at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that sup ports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsec tion 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for per sonal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a partic ular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardl
64. blocks or forwards packets from devices with the specified OUI in the MAC address The OUI field is the first three NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management octets in a MAC address and uniquely identifies the manufacturer of a network device STUN STUN allows a device to find the public IP address assigned by a NAT router and or a firewall between it and the public Internet 17 9 ACS Screen 17 9 1 The ACS screen allows you to set up the ACS server information on your NBG4604 so it can be remotely updated Only use information provided by your network administrator You can also upload encrypted security certificates to your NBG4604 STUN STUN Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol UDP through Network Address Translators allows the NBG4604 to find the presence and types of NAT routers and or firewalls between it and the public Internet STUN also allows the NBG4604 to find the public IP address that NAT assigned STUN does not work with symmetric NAT routers or firewalls See RFC 3489 for details on STUN The following figure shows how STUN works The NBG4604 A sends packets to the STUN server B The STUN server B finds the public IP address and port number that the NAT router used on the NBGA4604 s packets and sends them to the NBG4604 The NBG4604 uses the public IP address and port number in the packets that it sends to the server C Figure 94 STUN NBG4604 User s Guide 16
65. by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the pur pose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by pub lic license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute soft ware through
66. c id and n name format For example C 12 or N My ISP This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP Get Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP automatically address from ISP Use fixed IP Select this radio button provided by your ISP to give the NBG4604 a address fixed unique IP address My IP Type the static IP address assigned to you by your ISP Address M h Subnet Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given as Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 4 Your IP Address The following wiz ard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the NBG4604 an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP Figure 20 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Address STEP T STEP 2 STEP 3 fa Internet Configuration Get automatical ly from your ISP Used fixed IP address provided by your ISP Next gt NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Wizard Step 3 Your IP Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Get automatically from Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP your ISP address This is the default selection If you choose this option skip directly to Section 4 4 9 on page 52
67. dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS You must have a public WAN IP address NBG4604 User s Guide 131 Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS 12 4 Dynamic DNS Screen To change your NBG4604 s DDNS click Network DDNS The screen appears as shown Figure 75 Network gt Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup T Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider wwwvDynbNs oRG v Dynamic DNS Type Dynamic DNS v Host Name O User Name Password Token I Enable Wildcard Option T Enable off line option Only applies to custom DNS IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address C Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address C use specified IP Address fi 0 0 0 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Network gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic Select this check box to use dynamic DNS DNS Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Dynamic DNS Type Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Name Enter a host names in the field provided You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma 132 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 12 Dynami
68. functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites Custom Level Default Level OK Cancel Apply 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Scripting 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default NBG4604 User s Guide 227 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 6 Click OK to close the window Figure 136 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings E 21 xl Settings Scripting B Active scripting C Y nicahle E Allow paste operations via script Q Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt E Scripting of Java applets Disable D Enable 2 Q Prompl v lleas Aikhanticstian ai m Reset custom settings j Reset to Medium Reset ced Java Permissions 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 UnderJava permissions make sure that a safety level is selected NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 137 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Q Disable 9 Enable 3 Font do
69. have entered is correctly Nailed up Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to Connection time out Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the NBG4604 automatically disconnects from the PPTP server PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Domain Type the IP address of the PPTP server Connection D Name Type your identification name for the PPTP server Get automatically from ISP Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This is the default selection Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address My WAN IP Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address Address My ti Subnet Your NBG4604 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based Mas on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4604 WAN IP Address Assi gnment Get automatically from ISP Select this to get your WAN IP address from your ISP DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4604 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the fi
70. into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help fa FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter EEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons Industry Canada Statement This device complies with RSS 210 of the Industry Canada Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions this device may not cause interference and NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with an antenna having a maximum gain of 2dBi Antenna having a higher gain is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the EIRP is not more than required for successful communication IMPORTANT NOTE IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure lim
71. is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG4604 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG4604 unless you are instructed to do otherwise 4 4 7 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG4604 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways 1 ThelSP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and or WAN gt Internet Connection screen 2 Ifthe ISP did not give you DNS server information leave the DNS Server fields set to 0 0 0 0 in the Wizard screen and or set to From ISP in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server addresses Figure 21 Wizard Step 3 WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses STEP 1
72. machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for soft ware interchange e b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corre sponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium cus tomarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Correspond ing Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place
73. not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 3 1 2 MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each wireless client see the appropriate User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct settings SSID channel and security If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct settings This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 3 1 3 User Authentication You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it This is called user authentication However ever
74. of common services that you can add in the Bandwidth Mgnt screen NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials NBG4604 User s Guide PART Il Technical Reference Wireless LAN 7 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG4604 See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 42 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B are called wireless clients The wireless clients use the access point AP to interact with other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your NBG4604 is the AP NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 7 4 on page 81 to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Use the MAC Filter screen Section 7 5 on page 87 to allow or deny wireless stations based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the NBG4604 Use the Advanced screen Section 7 6 on page 89 to allow intra BSS networking and set the RTS CTS Threshold Use the QoS screen Section 7 7 on page 90 to ensure Quality of Service QoS in your wireless network Use the WPS screen Section 7 8 on page 93 to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having t
75. on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 4 4 6 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your NBG4604 but make sure that no other device on your network
76. on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an exe cutable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Correspond ing Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work 2 Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the outp
77. only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 7 11 2 Security Mode WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Use this screen to configure the WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security for your NBG4604 when it is in AP Bridge or Bridge Only mode Figure 56 Network Wireless LAN WDS WPA PSK WPA2 PSK WDS Setup Basic Setting Local MAC Address Security Security Mode Pre Shared Key Remote MAC Address Disable 00 13 49 f5 18 c5 po oo 00 00 00 00 WPA2 PSK Apply Refresh NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Refer to Table 35 on page 97 for descriptions of other fields in this screen Table 37 Network Wireless LAN WDS WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Key Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols NBG4604 User s Guide WAN 8 1 Overview This chapter discusses the NBG4604 s WAN screens Use these screens to configure your NBG4604 for Internet access A WAN Wide Area Network connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet It connects your private networks such as a LAN Local Area Network and other networks so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations Figure 57 LAN and WAN See the chapter about the connection wizard for more informati
78. or WPA2 PSK in your NBG4604 you can also select an option WPA Compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG4604 Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key 7 3 1 5 WPS WiFi Protected Setup WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Depending on the devices in your network you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN Personal Identification Number in the devices Then they connect and set up a secure network by themselves See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 6 2 1 on page 63 7T 4 General Wireless LAN Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode Note If you are configuring the NBG4604 from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG4604 s SSID channel or security settings you will lose your wireles
79. or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http WWwW Zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products NBG4604 User s Guide Index A ACL rule 139 ACS 166 Address Assignment 102 Alert 185 alternative subnet mask notation 216 AP 21 AP Access Point 251 AP Mode menu 58 overview 55 status screen 56 AP Bridge 21 Auto bridge 112 Backup configuration 192 Bandwidth management overview 151 priority 156 services 157 BitTorrent 158 Bridge Repeater 21 BSS 249 C CA 256 Certificate Authority 256 certifications 283 notices 285 viewing 286 Channel 32 57 251 Interference 251 channel 78 Index Configuration backup 192 reset the factory defaults 194 restore 193 content filtering 143 by keyword in URL 144 by web feature 143 copyright 283 CPU usage 32 57 CTS Clear to Send 252 D Daylight saving 182 DDNS 131 see also Dynamic DNS service providers 132 DHCP 35 117 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP client information 120 DHCP client list 120 DHCP server 114 117 DHCP table 36 120 DHCP client information DHC
80. over Ethernet option for a dial up connection If your ISP gave you an IP address and or subnet mask then select PPTP PPTP Select the PPTP option for a dial up connection 4 4 1 Ethernet Connection Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet Continue to Section 4 4 4 on page 48 Figure 17 Wizard Step 3 Ethernet Connection STEP T STEP 2 STEP 3 fa Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s connection settings Connection Type mex net bat NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 4 2 PPPoE Connection Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE functions as a dial up connection PPPoE is an IETF Internet Engineering Task Force standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem for example DSL cable wireless etc to achieve access to high speed data networks For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for instance RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the br
81. router using the same SSID channel and security settings Figure 8 Summary Wireless Association List Association List 1 00 19 cb 04 80 1e 03 52 42 2000 01 01 Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Summary Wireless Association List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station Association Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG4604 s WLAN network Refresh Click Refresh to reload the list NBG4604 User s Guide Connection Wizard 4 1 Wizard Setup This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the Web Configurator The Web Configurator s wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet Refer to your ISP Internet Service Provider checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field Leave a field blank if you don t have that information 1 After you access the NBG4604 Web Configurator click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink You can click Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure basic or advanced features accordingly Figure 9 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode English Deutsch Francais Espa ol amp x Italiano
82. rule Local Start End Port Public Start End Port This field displays the port number s Server IP This field displays the inside IP address of the server Address Modify Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule Click the Remove icon to delete a rule NBG4604 User s Guide 127 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 11 5 NAT Advanced Screen Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service coming in from the server on the WAN to the IP address of a computer on the client side LAN The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer you have to manually replace the LAN computer s IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer s IP address Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service The NBG4604 records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol a trigger port When the NBG4604 s WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol incoming port the NBG4604 forwards the traffic to the LAN
83. the IP address relative to the field listed above This field displays the computer host name MAC Address Refresh This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address which uniquely identifies a device The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Click Refresh to renew the screen 3 6 3 Summary Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here includes port status packet specific statistics and the NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator system up time The Poll I nterval s field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen Figure 7 Summary Packet Statistics Packet Statistics RCENECCENETONATONETTTNETTEEUTTN WAN 100M 876235 809818 LAN 100M 610753 886992 1676 WLAN N A 958 3019 System Up Time 1 41 47 Poll Interval gs lt Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Summary Packet Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the NBG4604 s port type Status For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected For the WAN port it displays the port speed and duplex set
84. the date and time with the time server after you click Apply User Defined Time Server Address Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday April and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday
85. the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon This value can be set from 20ms to 1000ms A high value helps save current consumption of the access point DTIM Delivery Traffic Indication Message DTIM is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management mode A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network This value can be set from 1 to 100 Preamble A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes long and short If a device uses a different preamble mode than the NBG4604 does it cannot communicate with the NBG4604 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 29 Network Wireless LAN Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION CTS Protection When set to None the NBG4604 protects wireless communication against interference When set to Always the NBG4604 improves performance within mixed wireless modes Select Auto to let the NBG4604 determine whether to turn this feature on or off in the current environment Tx Power This field controls the transmission power of the NBG4604 When using the NBG4604 with a notebook computer select a lower transmission power level when you are close to the AP in order to conserve battery power Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset
86. the server Read Enter the SNMP read community information here Community Set Enter the SNMP get community information here Community System Enter the SNMP system location Location System Enter the SNMP system contact Contact Trap Settings Trap Settings Select this to enable trap settings on this device Trap Manager Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to IP Trap Type the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to Community the SNMP manager The default is public and allows all requests Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604 Cancel Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 8 The ACS Screen An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the NBG4604 modify its settings perform firmware upgrades and monitor and diagnose it In order to do So you must enable the TR 069 feature on your NBG4604 and then configure it appropriately The ACS server which it will use must also be configured by its administrator The following terms and concepts may help as you read this part ACS An Auto Configuration Server ACS centralizes the management and configuration of a variety of networking devices such as routers set top boxes Voice over IP Vol P gateways and other Customer Premises Equipment CPE It is based on the TR 069 standard OUI Filter An Organizationally Unique Identifier OUI filter
87. the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application sup plied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works
88. this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using sell ing offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it 11 Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use u
89. this tutorial you need to add each of the following service see table below and click Apply Table 22 Services and Values SERVICES FIELDS REAL AUDIO RTSP VDO LIVE FTP Active Check this to turn on this bandwidth management rule Direction Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic Select To WAN that the NBG4604 forwards to both the LAN and the WAN LAN IP Enter 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 Enter Range 192 168 1 34 Protocol TCP TCP or UDP TCP TCP Port Range 7070 554 7000 20 21 Policy Min Max Rate Select 30M as the minimum bandwidth allowed Select 64K Apply Click this to add the rule to the Bandwidth Allocation table After adding these services go to Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced and check if you have the correct values Figure 41 Tutorial Bandwidth Allocation Example Bandwidth Allocation LAN IP Range 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 Policy Port Range 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 34 ofjojujoj af s jojn e Fes e o Note The Policy column displays either Max maximum or Min minimum This is directly directed to the value in the Rate column For example you selected Min and entered 30M as the rate for the VoIP service The NBG4604 allocates at least 30 megabytes for the VoIP service Refer to Appedix F on page 261 for a list
90. timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling You can change the timeout period in the System screen NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 17 4 WWW Screen To change your NBG4604 s World Wide Web settings click Management gt Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen Figure 89 Management gt Remote MGMT gt WWW www Server Port soso Apply for remote WAN site only Server Access LAN ee bc Secured Client WAN IP Address All Selected p 0 0 0 Q Note 1 For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Management gt Remote MGMT gt WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG4604 using this service Secured Client A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate IP Address with the NBG4604 using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG4604 using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG4604 using this service Note This only applies on WAN IP
91. typically used for all other traffic that are not time sensitive User Defined Service Rule Configuration If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for specific protocols on an IP or IP range click the Edit icon in the Bandwidth Allocation table of the Advanced screen The following screen displays Figure 88 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced Allocation Setup Bandwidth Allocation Setup D active Direction ToWAN v LAN IP Range 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Protocol ALL Port Range 1 165535 Policy Min z Rate 1000 Kbps User Defined Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced Allocation Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to turn on this bandwidth management rule Direction Enter whether you want to apply the rule to uplink or downlink traffic To LAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from WAN to LAN WLAN i e downlink To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN i e uplink Select Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG4604 forwards to both the LAN and the WAN LAN IP Range Specify the range of IP addresses for which the bandwidth management rule applies Protocol Select the protocol TCP UDP SMTP HTTP POP3 FTP or ALL for which the bandwidth management rule applies NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 16 Ban
92. while firmware upload is in progress After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen wait two minutes before logging into the NBG4604 again Figure 112 Upload Warning Firmware Upload In Process LDP CE Please Wait Please wait for the device to finish restarting PWR LED is on steady This should take about two minutes To access the device after a successful firmware upload you need to log in again Check your new firmware version in the system status menu 190 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools The NBG4604 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 113 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 114 Upload Error Message system Upload Firmware upload error The uploaded file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file Click Help for more information Return NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools 21 4 Configuration Screen Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuratio
93. you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port 8 3 2 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 Figure 58 Multicast Example In the multicast example above systems A and D comprise one multicast group In multicasting the server only needs to send one data stream and this is delivered to systems A and D IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data The NBG4604 supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 I GMP v2 At start up the NBG4604 queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the NBG4604 periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the NBG4604 LAN and or WAN interfaces in the Web Configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN 8 3 3 NetBIOS over TCP IP NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls However it may sometimes be necessary to al
94. 0 00 p 000 00 00 00 00 00 00 p 000 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 foooo 6 00 00 00 00 00 00 foooo 7 00 00 00 00 00 00 o 0 0 0 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 foo DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server From ISP Second DNS Server From ISP Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Static DHCP Table This is the index number of the static IP table entry row MAC Address Type the MAC address with colons of a computer on your LAN IP Address Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN DNS Server DNS Servers The NBG4604 passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP Assigned by address in the order you specify here to the DHCP clients The DHCP Server NBG4604 only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server Table 44 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION First DNS Server Second DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4604 s WAN IP address The field to the r
95. 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO Di si nial sel WIinie 00 00 00 00 00 00 o Q0 00 00 00 00 00 Q0 00 00 00 00 00 N Q0 Q0 00 00 00 00 w 00 00 00 00 00 00 EN Q0 Q0 00 00 00 00 in 00 00 00 00 00 00 an 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 28 Network Wireless LAN MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Deny to block access to the NBG4604 MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG4604 Select Allow to permit access to the NBG4604 MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG4604 Set This is the index number of the MAC address MAC Address Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG4604 in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click R
96. 4 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP in the WEP Encryption field Select Auto Open System or Shared Key from the drop down list box This field specifies whether the wireless clients have to provide the WEP key to login to the wireless client Keep this setting at Auto or Open System unless you want to force a key verification before communication between the wireless client and the ZyXEL Device occurs Select Shared Key to force the clients to provide the WEP key NBG4604 User s Guide prior to communication Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 26 Network Wireless LAN General Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key The preceding Ox that identifies a hexadecimal key is entered automatically Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG4604 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure at least one key only one key can be activated at any one time The default key is key 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to reload the previous config
97. 55 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the NBG4604 Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your NBG4604 that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG4604 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address NBG4604 User s Guide 221 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask
98. 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notic
99. 7 Chapter 17 Remote Management Click Management gt Remote MGMT gt ACS to open this screen Figure 95 Management gt Remote MGMT gt ACS ACS Server Setup URL http Account Name user Password Period 30 Device Configuration Manufacturer ZyXEL Manufacture Oui 404A0 Product Class Gatewa Model Name NBG4604 Device Connection Request Username Password Device Connection Request STUN Server STUN Username STUN Password Logs Backup Clear Logs Upload Certificate File Path Browse CA Certificate Upload Clean Client Certificate Upload Ciesa Client Key Upload Ci Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Management Remote MGMT ACS LABEL DESCRIPTION ACS Server Setup URL Enter the URL of the ACS server Account Name Enter the login name used by the NBG4604 to log into the ACS server Password Enter the password for the account used to log into the ACS server Period Enter the duration in seconds over which the NBG4604 attempts to log into the ACS server Device Configuration Manufacturer This displays the manufacturer name of the NBG4604 ZyXEL and cannot be edited NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Table 65 Management gt Remote MGMT gt ACS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Manufacturer Oui Product Class Enter the manufacturer organizational unit identifier Th
100. 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has NBG4604 User s Guide 253 Appendix D Wireless LANs several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 87 IEEE 802 11g MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5 11 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 48 54 IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are User based identification that allows for roaming Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless stations RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client serve
101. AC address Advanced Use this screen to configure other advanced properties LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask DHCP General Use this screen to enable the NBG4604 s DHCP server Server 7 SES Advanced Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT Application Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG4604 Advanced Use this screen to change your NBG4604 s port triggering settings DDNS General Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall Access Use this screen to view the configured access control Control Rule rules and add edit or remove a rule Services This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules and allows you to edit add a firewall rule Content Filter Use this screen to block certain web features and sites Filter containing certain keywords in the URL Management NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator Table 4 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Static P Static Use this screen to configure IP static routes Route Route Bandwidth General Use thi
102. AN IP Addresses The LAN parameters of the NBG4604 are preset in the factory with the following values P address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address es read the embedded Web Configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured 9 3 1 IP Pool Setup The NBG4604 is pre configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses excluding the NBG4604 itself in the lower range 192 168 1 2 to 192 168 1 32 for other server computers for instance servers for mail FTP TFTP web etc that you may have Refer to Section 4 4 6 on page 49 for information on IP Address and Subnet Mask 9 3 2 LAN TCP IP The NBG4604 has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability Refer to the Section 4 4 7 on page 50 section for information on System DNS Servers NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 9 LAN 9 4 LAN IP Screen Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings Click Network gt LAN Figure 66 Network LAN IP LAN TCP IP IP Address IP Subnet Mask Get from DHCP Server ol User Definied LAN IP 192 168 1 2 255 255 2550 Apply Reset
103. AT gt Application LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Application Rule Active Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry Service Name Type a name of up to 31 printable characters to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name Otherwise select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name The predefined service name and port number s will display in the Service Name and Port fields Local Port Enter the port number ranges to be forwarded Range Public Port Range Server IP Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the Address port s specified in the Port field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table Reset Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and Port fields to the previous one NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 47 Network gt NAT gt Application continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Application Rules Summary This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry Active This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled Name This field displays a name to identify this
104. Client A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate P Address with the NBG4604 using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG4604 using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG4604 using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 7 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices Your NBG4604 supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the NBG4604 through the network The NBG4604 supports SNMP version one NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation Figure 92 SNMP Management Model MANAGER SNMP AGENT AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the NBG4604 An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network mana
105. Client Key Click Upload to copy the certicate listed in File Path to the NBG4604 Click Clear Key to remove the current CA Certificate from the device Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 17 10 Technical Reference TR 069 is an abbreviation of Technical Reference 069 a protocol designed to facilitate the remote management of Customer Premise Equipement CPE such as the NBG4604 It can be managed over a WAN by means of an Auto Configuration Server ACS TR 069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls RPCs between the ACS and the client device RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language XML format over HTTP or HTTPS Figure 96 TR 069 Example In this example the NBG4604 receives data from at least 2 sources an HTTP server for handling web services and an ACS for configuring the NBG4604 remotely All three servers are owned and operated by the client s Internet Service Provider However without the configuration settings from the ACS the NBG4604 cannot access the other server Once the NBG4604 receives its configuration settings and implements them it can connect to the other server If the settings change it will once again be unable to connect until it receives its updates from the ACS The NBG4604 can be configured to periodically check for updates from the auto configuration
106. DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your NBG4604 Each time you reload this page the NBG4604 synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your NBG4604 Each time you reload this page the NBG4604 synchronizes the date with the time server Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 19 System Table 68 Maintenance System Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually hh mm ss When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new time in this field and then click Apply New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually yyyy mm dd When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the NBG4604 get the time and date from the time server you specified below Auto Select Auto to have the NBG4604 automatically search for an available time server and synchronize
107. Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP No Enable WPA PSK TKIP Yes Enable WPA2 AES No Enable WPA2 PSK AES Yes Enable NBG4604 User s Guide Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 90 Examples of Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC_TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from
108. E RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE NBG4604 User s Guide 275 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 276 COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share an
109. EL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the pro gram with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement 3 Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by International Copyright Law and trade secret law and by international treaty provisions All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation 4 Restrictions You ma
110. FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIA BILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes zlib 1 2 3 software under below license License zlib h interface of the zlib general purpose compression library NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements version 1 2 3 July 18th 2005 Copyright C 1995 2005 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented a
111. IP address and file path separately it will not find items that go across the two For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the NBG4604 would find tw in the domain name www zyxel com tw It would also find news in the file path news pressroom php but it would not find tw news 14 4 Filter Screen Use this screen to restrict web features add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer Click Security gt Content Filter to open the Filter screen Figure 81 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter Keyword Blocking T Enable URL Keyword Blocking Keyword Add Keyword List Maximum 20 records Delete Clear an Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 14 Content Filtering The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Security gt Content Filter gt Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable URL The NBG4604 can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain Keyword keywords in the domain name or IP address For example if the Blocking keyword bad was enabled all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked e g URL http www Website com bad html would be blocked Select this check box to enable this feature Keyword Type a keyword in this field You may use any character up to 64 characters Wildcards are not allowed You can also enter a numerical IP address Keyword List Add T
112. Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service war ranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been mod ified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special pass word or key for unpacking reading or copying 7 Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its con ditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be wr
113. K 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet If you know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 159 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 After you edit and save the configuration files you must restart the network card Enter network restart inthe etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Figure 160 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 Shutting down loopback interface Setting network parameters Bringing up loopback interface Bringing up interface eth0 oOoOoooOo ROR ROR N NBG4604 User s Guide 247 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 25 1 1 Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties Figure 161 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties root localhost ifconfig eth0 Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 inet addr 172 23 19 129 Bcast 172 23 19 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 730412
114. L IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NetBI OS TCP UDP 137 The Network Basic Input Output System is used for communication TCP UDP 138 between computers in a LAN TCP UDP 139 TCP UDP 445 NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix E Services Table 90 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling GRE Protocol enables secure transfer of data over pu
115. N IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address IP Subnet Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field Mask Gateway IP Enter a Gateway IP Address if your ISP gave you one in this field Address DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4604 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG4604 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and enter com
116. NBG4604 Wireless N Gigabit Managed Router Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 1 1 Username admin Password 1234 Username supervisor Password supervisor Firmware Version 1 0 Edition 4 10 2010 www zyxel com Copyright 2010 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG4604 using the Web Configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Tips for Reading User s Guides On Screen When reading a ZyXEL User s Guide On Screen keep the following in mind f you don t already have the latest version of Adobe Reader you can download it from http www adobe com Use the PDF s bookmarks to quickly navigate to the areas that interest you Adobe Reader s bookmarks pane opens by default in all ZyXEL User s Guide PDFs f you know the page number or know vaguely which page range you want to view you can enter a number in the toolbar in Reader then press ENTER to jump directly to that page Type CTRL F to open the Adobe Reader search utility and enter a word or phrase This can help you quickly pinpoint the information you require You can also enter text directly into the toolbar in Reader To quickly move around within a page press the SPACE bar This turns your cursor into a hand with whi
117. NBG4604 but my Internet connection is not available anymore NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 5 on page 22 2 Reboot the NBG4604 3 Ifthe problem continues contact your ISP The Internet connection is slow or intermittent 1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 5 on page 22 If the NBG4604 is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications 2 Check the signal strength If the signal strength is low try moving the NBG4604 closer to the AP if possible and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network for example microwaves other wireless networks and so on 3 Reboot the NBG4604 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestion Check the settings for QoS If it is disabled you might consider activating it 24 4 Resetting the NBG4604 to Its Factory Defaults If you reset the NBG4604 you lose all of the changes you have made The NBG4604 re loads its default settings and the password resets to 1234 You have to make all of your changes again You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET bu
118. ND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and pr
119. None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity No No Yes Yes No Protection WPA 2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 11i standard WPA2 IEEE 802 11i is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA 2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x In addition to TKI P WPA2 also uses Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server It includes a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism NBG4604 User s Guide 257 Appendix D Wireless LANs TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the pair wise key to dynamically gene
120. P status Dimensions 209 disclaimer 283 DNS 50 119 DNS server see also Domain name system DNS Server 102 DNS server 119 Domain name 41 vs host name see also system name Domain Name System 119 Domain Name System See DNS duplex setting 33 58 Dynamic DNS 131 NBG4604 User s Guide 287 Index Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 117 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 256 DynDNS 132 DynDNS see also DDNS 132 DynDNS Wildcard 131 E EAP Authentication 255 e mail 92 Encryption 257 encryption 80 and local user database 80 key 81 WPA compatible 80 ESS 250 ESSID 206 Extended Service Set 250 Extended wireless security 44 F Factory LAN defaults 114 117 FCC interference statement 283 File Transfer Program 157 Firewall CMP packets 140 ZyXEL device firewall 136 firewall stateful inspection 135 Firmware upload 189 file extension using HTTP firmware version 32 57 Fragmentation Threshold 253 FTP 162 FTP see also File Transfer Program 157 G gateway 148 General wireless LAN screen 81 H Hidden Node 251 HTTP 157 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 157 I ANA 222 IBSS 249 IEEE 802 119 253 IGMP 103 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 103 Independent Basic Service Set 249 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet connection Ethernet PPPoE see also PPP over Ethernet PPTP WAN connection Internet connection wizard 44 Internet Group Multicast Protocol
121. R 86 AES edil aee ev Tu rra r Tre 87 7 6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen issue etssases ehe rtesdi senec ione p rM FINA RO ERREA 89 7 4 GAINS or service TC SOBB asses cn pecOe ko RE DU RE Ku Dn Rie UR S Nep uir DG 90 2 7 Application Priority Configuratio sissies tia seidisacn cabin temo at Rx SUULE a cau 2a Foo acad Dua 92 CB WP DOSE os id ueeetiai testa dicm Meet u ima Lu eeu m upadidu mss EM Eos isle n NE 93 TO PS NON SO OG IN soiin ana rte ca aad e er eter ba e t a aate da 94 ToU ohiedalih DOESGIE 22i eub inest a ludsolse deditos p did pee dU i Oba 95 FEMINAE MEE E S D E I eteeemiee eens 96 OL Secun Mode DUM WEP sanoneen Eoo eto CRUS ad aD aaa Uu aaro io 98 7 11 2 Security Made WPA PSKWWEAO PSI ssscsccccccssecscastcsenoansncsneccesaaconscusavaasecessionsenertaas 99 Chapter 8 MM PAIN e 101 ONE UI ET E E E US mU EIER 101 Be What vod Cs Docuit eta E talc io a ide eae dec 101 RON Vila FORINT TO lo erre M 102 8 3 1 Configuring Your Internet Connection Lies etr rcnt ran ren rna ei a a 102 Base NIKIEROSIBE iscest ii edusberibiidbb a a due ace ae Seu dU bec UP RU R Ep eda SU QUNM Deco U EO P ie RM bI EDD 103 To S NEROS mor TOPP e Em 104 E E Ree M rM 104 Anema CH uoceueducscteimiirestt ola Qaa apta into n quaes oe dissb onc mostetisded sot cu darte certes 105 ABS rie EncapsudiBll ON jcccedssstuanderaeie
122. R A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does Copyright C year name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option
123. Remote MAC Address 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 Remote MAC Address 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 Remote MAC Address 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 Remote MAC Address 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 Security Security Mode No Security ro The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS LABEL DESCRIPTION WDS Setup Basic Settings Select the operating mode for your NBG4604 AP Bridge The NBG4604 functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously Bridge The NBG4604 acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device which also must be in bridge mode The NBG4604 can establish up to five wireless links with other APs Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature Local MAC This is the MAC address of your NBG4604 Address Phy Mode Select a WDS physical layer transceiver mode Remote MAC This is the MAC address of the peer device that your NBG4604 wants to Address make a bridge connection with You can connect to up to 4 peer devices Security Security Mode Note WDS security is independent of the security settings between the NBG4604 and any wireless clients The WDS is set to No Security by default Refer to Section 7 11 1 on page 98 to view the screen for Static WEP security e Refer to Section 7 11 2 on page 99 to view the screen for WPA2 PSK security Apply Cl
124. SS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate Figure 164 Infrastructure WLAN N if BSS 1 oe Wireless Station B Th Station C Meg lam t Md Am mmm NES wem T gt or oe Et c 7 TES o wx guck mU Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by IEEE 802 11a b g wireless devices Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your region so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP i
125. Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es f you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them Figure 148 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11 Turn on your Presti
126. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Note Do not turn off the NBG4604 while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a configuration upload successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG4604 again Figure 116 Configuration Restore Successful Restore Configuration successful gt J PX The Device Is Rebooting y Now After the device finishes rebooting the login screen display The NBG4604 automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 117 Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG4604 IP address 192 168 1 1 See Appendix C on page 231 for details on how to set up your computer s IP address NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools 21 4 3 If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 118 Configura
127. Use fixed IP address Select this option if you were given IP address and or DNS server provided by your ISP settings by the ISP The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 5 WAN IP Address Assignment Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for instance only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks Table 15 Private IP Address Ranges 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information
128. WAN to LAN WLAN i e downlink To WAN applies bandwidth management to traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN i e uplink Both applies bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG4604 forwards to both the LAN and the WAN Port Range This displays the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule applies Policy This displays either Max maximum or Min minimum and refers to the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second in the field below Rate This is the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed refer to the field above for the rule in bits per second Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen See Section 16 5 2 on page 156 for more information Click the Remove icon to delete a rule Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide 155 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 16 5 1 16 5 2 Priority Levels Traffic with a higher priority gets through faster while traffic with a lower priority is dropped if the network is congested The following describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the NBG4604 forwards out through an interface High Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Low This is
129. a 42 4 3 1 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security 0 cccccsessceeescceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneaes 44 4 4 Connection Wizard STEP 3 Internet Configuration ieeeeccceeeccneere tnter neces 44 7A Ebene CONO aukeocpiiperasderter pa adorti earns eol bonita a ut addere pado 45 2242 PPPOE GOES aac se ssaast a diei ed eqohbeetledao ces Qiodubbe ces quse e CE DOREM Meanie Qd URP S Ud 46 sA a PPIP CODO sarios a peat scs te Ett ete Mr erc e Fees ine Aa N a 47 LIA Andr LT 48 44 5 WAN IP Address Assignimeni us aeocoocddes bored dde rhe p eae ies ule esi Re etui too e ord E ia 49 4 4 6 IP Address and Subnet MASK uie rane n gren Erhalt n LR ak 49 4 4 7 DNS Server Address Assignment eeeesssssssssssssssee entente 50 4 4 8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment cccceeseeeeeteeeeeaeeteeeeeeeaeeeeenees 51 24 0 WAN MAC AQUEGS ainara b cedido dag aa d P ER D nq bogus ada Tec ang 52 45 Connection VBA do err D iia EE AE EAS 53 Chapter 5 AF MOJE rosna AA aR N A 55 SAES LE I 55 5 2 Setting your NBG4604 to AP Mode ssssseseeeseesssesssessssesssssssressrnssrnsssnnssinesrnnsrrnssrenssresesene 55 DO UALS Sareen AP MOUE P apneni aea o E AEA 56 SD NOURI FNE oer ugacvyfo b uda vio Maori ad ae Fa aad Pra aga ad dE n 58 eR Coniguing our Seinge sascun a 1 000 S ESSE 60 MENS EOD M 60 54 2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings sinc cscs ceraseacui attuare stati Esc ed Uc i Eod 60 5 5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode sicsscccessc
130. abaco Ded nub e dx odes dx Roe Dri bap eai 160 TFs s sr MEL e n 160 IACTA D DEUM Umm maaan 161 12o Te TST ILES I UU 162 GS FP OCON eer 162 ESTA mE TI CNET UC UU I I TTE 163 TT COCHIN SNMP ustscciindeeba Ep Debabecti iube N 165 17 8 Ihe ADS SCRE uuisieri verna ui ces d ce aie a e c E IR Ev d c V an a cR 166 DERE ER EE I c NET TD OD EL D eaten 167 WET een 167 NBG4604 User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 1710 TECNICA REN OO e NUTRIT MTM 170 Chapter 18 Universal Piug and Play UP GP m 171 Lio Ge n err 171 WS VAL Ue up E 171 18 2 What You Negd 10 KION acsuuissdearkenscxndd aia Pad eraat kon tdaa Exi rbx ask sae E KE x ORA EX RR TEM KL sp 171 TOA IPP SOO csiccsvelasanisttiaaudecssdeiadeanacaiadanienbtadudnetsdeladatsavsdudaniessdaladiaiateiaiantansdaaddieiaaienusdis 172 18 5 Techmcal Pa NC catches ev srrs sis cones atid pastasatn pauaita vr a ree waduaaeka Mert ex Hp n ERROR 173 18 5 1 Using UPnP in Windows AP Example 2e miei eate oec rea acc enam 173 18 5 2 Web Contigurator Easy ACCOSS ausos estan race ebesp cada c an a r a EE LNEE 176 Chapter 19 SYSTE 179 TE COUBDUEBUE cnm Deuda ed uel hin da odes canbe SUP EE Dd odas cagbL eat et anf amud incide Bub R cor f 179 D Argos TEREIOEb M e 179 19 3 vete General SORBEII Lausspasuiipbodsiexinandiuntaptodag ient ax oopobd s C dpa a ada ko ul a 179 T8 Die Seting RO NCE
131. agmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless network There are two preamble modes Long and Short Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead so it should be used in a good wireless network environment when all wireless stations support it Select Long if you have a noisy network or are unsure of what preamble mode your wireless stations support as all IEEE 802 11b compliant wireless adapters must support long preamble However not all wireless adapters support short preamble Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support to ensure interpretability between the AP and the wireless stations and to provide more reliable communication in noisy networks Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all wireless stations support it otherwise the AP uses long preamble Note The AP and the wireless stations MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE
132. also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address es and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method DNS Server Address Assignment Use Domain Name System DNS to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it The NBG4604 can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses manually enter them in the DNS server fields If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses along with the NBG4604 s WAN IP address set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN WAN MAC Address The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address Otherwise click Clone the computer s MAC address I P Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to configuration file It is recommended that
133. any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version pub lished by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author t
134. any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very c
135. as rules are applied in turn Active This field displays whether a rule is turned on or not A green bulb signifies that this rule is active A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active Name This displays the name of the rule Source IP This displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this Address rule applies Service List Select the service to which this rule applies from the drop down list box Select Protocol Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop down list box If you want to configure a customized protocol select Specific Protocol Protocol Type This displays the IP port that defines your customized port Port Range This displays the port number or the range of port numbers of the destination Action This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets Drop discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Reject or allows the passage of packets Permit Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall 13 5 1 Add Edit an ACL Rule Click Add New ACL Rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Access Control screen The following screen displays Figure 79 Access Control Rule
136. ask This shows the WAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the WAN port s DHCP role Client or None LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Server or None WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN On or Off Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG4604 is currently using over the wireless LAN 802 11 Mode This shows the wireless standard SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4604 in the wireless LAN WPS This displays Configured when the WPS has been set up This displays Unconfigured if the WPS has not been set up Click the status to display Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS screen System Status System Up Time This is the total time the NBG4604 has been on Current Date Time This field displays your NBG4604 s present date and time System Resource CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG4604 s processing ability is currently used When this percentage is close to 10096 the NBG4604 is run
137. at any one time NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list Figure 45 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Static WEP Wireless Setup v Enable Wireless LAN Enable Wireless LANs Name SSID 1 Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel Width Security SSID Selection E Iv Security Mode Enable Hide SSID WEP Encryption Authentication Method Note Key 1 Okey 2 Okey 3 Okey 4 Enable Intra BSS Traffic 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled 1 w ZyXEL V Auto Channel Selection Channel 4 20 MHz ZyXEL v Static WEP 64 bit WEP Open System v for each Key 1 4 A F for each Key 1 4 Gascu OnHex The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 26 Network Wireless LAN General Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION WEP Encryption Select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP to enable data encryption Authentication Method This field is activated when you select 6
138. ation This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may ter minate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement 11 General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documen tation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification
139. ation Example You need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS server 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the pair wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method key management protocol type MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 89 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD KEY ENCRYPTIO ENTER IEEE 802 1X MANAGEMENT N METHOD MANUAL KEY PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with
140. ations to wireless network Push Button Or input stations s PIN number Start 1 The Push Button Configuration requires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds 2 You may find the PIN number in the station s utility NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Network Wireless LAN WPS Station LABEL DESCRIPTION Push Button Use this button when you use the PBC Push Button Configuration method to configure wireless stations s wireless settings Click this to start WPS aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization Or input Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to station s PIN configure wireless station s wireless settings number Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station s utility Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization 7 10 Scheduling Screen Use this screen to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off Wireless LAN scheduling is disabled by default The wireless LAN can be scheduled to turn on or off on certain days and at certain times To open this screen click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling tab Figure 53 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling Scheduling Wireless LAN Scheduling Setup Enable Wireless LAN Schedul
141. bled by default Java permissions enabled by default Note Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 131 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab NBG4604 User s Guide 223 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 132 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options AR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use
142. blic networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login ROADRUNNER TCP UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network NBG4604 User s Guide Servers Appendix E Services Table 90 Examples of Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug and Play UPnP SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login
143. bute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to mod ify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License There fore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicat
144. button Start or WPS button Log into NBG4604 s Web Configurator and press the Push Button button in the Network gt Wireless Client gt WPS Station screen Note Your NBG4604 has a WPS button located on its panel as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility Both buttons have exactly the same function you can use one or the other Note It doesn t matter which button is pressed first You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one The NBG4604 sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4604 securely NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG4604 and wireless client the NWD210N in this example Figure 30 Example WPS Process PBC Method Wireless Client NBG4604 WITHIN 2 MINUTES Z 7 Ey SECURITY INFO f LE NN NN E SONS NND NN NN END EN GN OS E E UN B COMMUNICATION in 6 2 1 2 PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method you need to use both NBG4604 s configuration interface and the client s utilities 1 Launch your wireless client s configuration utility Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Network gt Wireless LAN gt WPS Statio
145. c DNS Table 49 Network gt Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter your user name Password Enter the password assigned to you Token Enter your client authorization key provided by the server to update DynDNS records This field is configurable only when you select WWW REGFI SH COM in the Service Provider field Enable Wildcard Option Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard Enable off line option This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL that you can specify while you are off line IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s to the WAN IP address Dynamic DNS Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s server auto detect automatically by the DDNS server It is recommended that you P Address select this option Use specified IP Type the IP address of the host name s Use this if you have a Address static IP address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 12 Dynamic DNS NBG4604 User s Guide Firewall 13 1 Overview Use these screens to enable and configure the firewall that protects your NBG4604 and your LAN from unwanted
146. c port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the NBG4604 allows multicast messages on the LAN only All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention 18 4 UPnP Screen 172 Use this screen to enable UPnP Click the Management UPnP to open the following screen Figure 97 Management gt UPnP gt General UPnP Setup Device Name ZyXEL NBG4604 Internet Sharing Gateway Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature Allow users to make port forwarding changes through UPnP Note 1 For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP 2 For WPS to function normally the UPnP service must be available NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP The following table describes the labels in this s
147. can access the web based configurator on the NBG4604 without finding out the IP address of the NBG4604 first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG4604 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places Figure 104 Network Connections s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe Q 2 JP Search gt gt Folders Ez Address e Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks 1 Internet Connection E Create a new connection Disabled 9 Set up a home or small Mp Internet Connection office network LAN or High Speed Internet Local Area Connection Enabled y a A Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast See Also 3 Network Troubleshooter Other Places s Control Pane 3 My Network Places i 1 My Documents 3 My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your NBG4604 and select Invoke The Web Configurator login screen displays Figure 105 Network Connections My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help O 3 Pp Search E Folders E Address My Network Places Network Tasks 2 Add a network place e View nebwork connections Invoke Setup a home or smal
148. ccsssscscassaetenesecasenccrsuscenaseceesansnnnensese 61 Chapter 6 A ne 63 He EIU C TM 63 6 2 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP cvscsss ccssscsetecescsactesnesecceesecsaedssceeccnsessecessacceneeeneds 63 6 2 1 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG4604 and Wireless Client 63 6 2 2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG4604 67 6 3 Bandwidth Management Tor your NetWork uere rrresdtne trt sati eere bY ndo Pep vio n oro VR Luo deu Va qa 70 6 3 1 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Application sesseeees 70 6 3 2 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Custom Application 71 6 3 3 Configuring Bandwidth Allocation by IP or IP Range seeeneeeeee 72 12 NBG4604 User s Guide Table of Contents Part Il Technical Reference eee eee eceeeee eere eene nnnn 75 Chapter 7 Pili ig LAN m rrr arene treet te Tren Terr rt rrr err RR 77 TOVON E E UU Ie 77 TA VRE i ENTIRE UTEM 78 zo What You Siro FAOW uses pru etc ere SP Pt E ag cS ER e tta tat eia 78 T a 1 Wireless Seg iity OVErVIOW TT TET 78 7A General Wireless LAN SOIBEH 2 iai ioc tete tis toco ete ias ba E nA EREN 81 FIC SNL EN D LOI LLLI T 83 Pombo WEE BERGE UPON drac cious ticles castes oxotne Ceci ien e deu rebea HT RE Db be Ep EPA UTER RES POE A oS epo R T RA OE pUE 84 TA OPP SKEN PA PO TL H
149. cense and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a Work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other lic ensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this sec tion to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine r
150. ch WPS connection works between two devices Both devices must support WPS check each device s documentation to make sure Depending on the devices you have you can either press a button on the device itself or in its configuration utility or enter a PIN a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other in each of the two devices When WPS is activated on a device it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated Then the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves For more information on using WPS see Section 6 2 1 on page 63 NBG4604 User s Guide 25 Chapter 2 The WPS Button NBG4604 User s Guide The Web Configurator 3 1 Overview This chapter describes how to access the NBG4604 Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens The Web Configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG4604 via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 7 0 and later or Firefox 1 5 and later The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowe
151. ch you can grab the page and move it around freely on your screen Embedded hyperlinks are actually cross references to related text Click them to jump to the corresponding section of the User s Guide PDF Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get your NBG4604 up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Supporting Disc The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents NBG4604 User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road Il Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com EET ET Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support User s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User G
152. ciated to the NBG4604 3 6 1 Navigation Panel Use the sub menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG4604 features The following table describes the sub menus Table 4 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the NBG4604 s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables Network NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator Table 4 Screens Summary LINK TAB FUNCTION Wireless General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN LAN MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG4604 to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG4604 Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings Qos Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WPS Use this screen to configure WPS WPS Station Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS Scheduling Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS on your NBG4604 WAN Internet This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters WAN Connection IP address assignment DNS servers and the WAN M
153. computed by the NBG4604 unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 222 NBG4604 User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScript ena
154. creen Table 66 Management gt UPnP gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature Select this check box to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the Web Configurator s login screen without entering the NBG4604 s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the Web Configurator Allow users to make port forwarding changes through UPnP Select this check box to allow UPnP enabled applications to automatically configure the NBG4604 so that they can communicate through the NBG4604 for example by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 5 Technical Reference The sections show examples of using UPnP 18 5 1 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG4604 Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG4604 Turn on your computer and the NBG4604 18 5 1 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click start and Control Panel Double clic
155. cryption keys for data encryption Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Dynamic Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP method
156. d change all versions of a pro gram to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your pro grams too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For t
157. d in Internet Explorer 3 2 Login Accounts There are two system accounts that you can use to log in to the NBG4604 admin and supervisor These two accounts have different privilege levels The web configurator screens vary depending on which account you use to log in The supervisor account allows you full access to all system configurations The default supervisor user name is supervisor and password js supervisor With the admin account you cannot access Remote MGMT screens and can only view the Sys OP Mode screen The default username is admin and password is 1234 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator 3 3 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 2 3 Make sure your NBG4604 hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG4604 refer to the Quick Start Guide Launch your web browser Type http 192 168 1 1 as the website address Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address If you are logging in with the admin account type 1234 default as the password If you are logging in with the supervisor account type supervisor default as the password Then click Login In some versions the default password appears automatically if this is the case click Login Figure 3 Admin Account Login ZyXEL NBG4604 Welcome to your device Configuration Interface Enter your password a
158. d priority assigned to an application Refer to Section 16 5 on page 153 Select Bandwidth Allocation allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific protocols on an IP or IP range Refer to Section 16 5 on page 153 Select Disable if you do not want to use this feature Total Bandwidth Setting The fields below appear when you enable Bandwidth Management Uplink Type or select the total amount of bandwidth from 64 Kbps to 30 Mbps that you want to dedicate to uplink traffic If you type the amount of bandwidth the selection automatically becomes User Defined If you select the amount of bandwidth the field automatically displays the value in Kbps This is traffic from LAN WLAN to WAN Downlink Type or select the total amount of bandwidth from 64 Kbps to 30 Mbps that you want to dedicate to downlink traffic If you type the amount of bandwidth the selection automatically becomes User Defined If you select the amount of bandwidth the field automatically displays the value in Kbps This is traffic from WAN to LAN WLAN Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 5 Advanced Configuration Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for the pre defined services or applications Use this screen to configure bandwidth managements rule for specific protocols on an IP or IP range Note This screen contains the Pr
159. device is designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz and or 5 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix G Legal Information Ce produit est concu pour les bandes de fr quences 2 4 GHz et ou 5 GHz conform ment la l gislation Europ enne En France m tropolitaine suivant les d cisions n 03 908 et 03 909 de l ARCEP la puissance d mission ne devra pas d passer 10 mW 10 dB dans le cadre d une installation WiFi en ext rieur pour les fr quences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483 5 MHz This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment
160. dividual application entry Name This field displays a description given to an application entry Service This field displays either FTP WWW E mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM Qos Dest Port This field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic Priority This field displays the priority of the application Highest Typically used for voice or video that should be high quality High Typically used for voice or video that can be medium quality Mid Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority For example Internet surfing Low Typically used for non critical background applications such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration screen Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4604 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 7 1 Application Priority Configuration Use this screen to edit a WMM QoS application entry Click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Figure 50 Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS Application Priority Configuration Name Service Dest Port Priority Application Priority Con
161. dress translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network NBG4604 User s Guide Address Translator NAT Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Note You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG4604 11 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 11 3 on page 124 to enable NAT and set a default server Use the Application screen Section 11 4 on page 125 to change your NBG4604 s port forwarding settings Use the Advanced screen Section 11 5 on page 128 to change your NBGA4604 s trigger port settings 11 3 General NAT Screen Use this screen to enable NAT and set a default server Click Network gt NAT to open the General screen Figure 71 Network NAT General NAT Setup M Enable Network Address Translation Default Server Setup Server IP Address foo 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network gt NAT gt General LABEL DESCRIPTION NAT Setup Enable Network Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet Address protocol address used within one network for example a private IP Translation address used in a local network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet Select the check box to enable NAT Default Server Setup NBG4604 User s Guid
162. dwidth Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Range Enter the range of ports for which the bandwidth management rule applies Policy Select Max or Min and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in bits per second in the field below Rate bps Type or select the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed refer to the field above for the rule in bits per second If you type the amount of bandwidth the selection automatically becomes User Defined If you select the amount of bandwidth the field automatically displays the value in Kbps Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 16 5 3 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management in the Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced screen Table 60 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 WWW The World Wide Web WWW is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other serv
163. e Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Table 46 Network NAT General LABEL DESCRIPTION Server IP In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default Address server A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen If you do not assign a Default Server IP address the NBG4604 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 4 NAT Application Screen Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server If the default is not defined the service request is simply discarded Note Many res
164. e NBG4604 in the screen below you will need to log into the NBG4604 again using the new IP address Figure 28 Network LAN IP LAN TCP IP Get from DHCP Server S User Definied LAN IP IP Address IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 192 16812 i Apply Reset The table below describes the labels in the screen Table 21 Network LAN IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Get from DHCP Server Select this to let the DHCP server in the gateway assign the NBG4604 IP address User Defined LAN IP Select this to give the NBG4604 a static IP address IP Address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notatiion The default setting is 192 168 1 2 If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your NBG4604 will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the NBG4604 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 5 4 2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in AP Mode is the same as for Router Mode See Chapter 5 on page 69 for information on the configuring your wireless network NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter
165. e Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to mod ify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License There fore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any fur ther restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether
166. e code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a pro gram is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writ ing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under
167. e port choose TCP from the drop down menu and enter 1863 in the Specific Port field Your priority table should now have the Vol P E mail and MSN Messenger services priorities set to High 6 3 3 Configuring Bandwidth Allocation by IP or IP Range For this example your company s 20th anniversary is coming up You want to use the multimedia room s Internet connection to upload some videos to the website You also use this room for video conferences radio broadcasts live video streaming and so on throughout the day While these media heavy activities are going on you still want to keep uploading the videos in the background As such you want to dedicate the minimum amount of bandwidth for this traffic You know the following Multimedia room s LAN IP range 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 34 P Address of the computer uploading through FTP 192 168 1 34 Services you want to configure REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 RTSP TCP or UDP 554 VDO LIVE TCP 7000 FTP TCP 20 21 Click the Edit icon in Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced to open the following screen Figure 40 Tutorial Bandwidth Allocation Example Bandwidth Allocation Setup D Active Direction Both S LAN IP Range 192 168 1 1 1192 168 1 33 Protocol TCP Port Range 7070 Policy Min Rate Kbps 30M Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Enter the following values for each service you want to add For
168. e the MAC address address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 52 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 5 Connection Wizard Complete Click Finish to complete the wizard setup Figure 23 Connection Wizard Complete Congratulation The Connection Wizard configuration is complete Finish button to complete Connection Wiz ing range EL products at www zyxel com Having Internet sroblems ur sett _If your wizard e e Int amp that your ISP a ntis acti nd that 3 If you still have problems Well done You have successfully set up your NBG4604 to operate on your network and access the Internet NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard NBG4604 User s Guide AP Mode 5 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG4604 is set to AP Mode Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP Mode Note See Chapter 6 on page 63 for an example of setting up a wireless network in AP mode Use your NBG4604 as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network In this mode your device bridges a wired network LAN and wirele
169. e with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the ve
170. e your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance
171. eadable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommer cial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsec tion b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler ker nel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute th
172. ed web features such as ActiveX controls Java and cookies attacks such as DoS and IPSec Log entries in red indicate system error logs The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Figure 109 Maintenance Logs View Log Yiew Log Logs Refresh Clear Logs p M 1 Dec 19 12 53 46 NTP Local time 2008 12 19 12 53 46 2 Dec 19 12 53 46 NTP Daylight saving status Disable 3 Dec 19 12 53 46 NTP Time zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore Taipei 4 Dec 19 11 53 43 NTP Local time 2008 12 19 11 53 43 5 Dec 19 11 53 43 NTP Daylight saving status Disable 6 Dec 19 11 53 43 NTP Time zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore Taipei 7 Dec 19 10 55 30 NET start Firewall 8 Dec 19 10 55 30 MET start NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Maintenance gt Logs gt View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Click Refresh to renew the log screen Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs This is the index number of the log entry Time This field displays the time the log was recorded See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the NBG4604 s time and date Message This field states the reason for the log
173. eld to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by either using the NBG4604 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN Table 40 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address and computer s MAC enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you address IP are cloning Once it is successfully configured the address will be Address copied to the rom file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this scre
174. en afresh 8 5 Advanced WAN Screen Use this screen to enable Multicast allow Windows Networking and enable Auto bridge Note The three categories shown in this screen are independent of each other To change your NBG4604 s advanced WAN settings click Network gt WAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 63 Network gt WAN gt Advanced Multicast Setup T multicast Auto bridge Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN and WAN allow Trigger Dial Enable Auto bridge mode Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Network WAN Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Setup Multicast Check this to enable multicasting This applies to traffic routed from the WAN to the LAN Leaving this blank may cause incoming traffic to be dropped or sent to all connected network devices Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP Allow between LAN and WAN Allow Trigger Dial Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to t
175. ended for everyday management of the NBG4604 using a supported web browser 1 4 Good Habits for Managing the NBG4604 Do the following things regularly to make the NBG4604 more secure and to manage the NBG4604 more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the NBG4604 to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the NBG4604 You could simply restore your last configuration 1 5 LEDs Figure 2 Front Panel The following table describes the LEDs and the WPS button Table1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWER Green On The NBG4604 is receiving power and functioning properly Off The NBG4604 is not receiving power 22 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Table1 Front Panel LEDs and WPS Button LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION WLAN Green On The NBG4604 is ready but is not sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Blinking The NBG4604 is sending receiving data through
176. er until the connection is closed or times out The NBG4604 times out in three minutes with UDP User Datagram Protocol or two hours with TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG4604 and going to the outside If an application needs a continuous data stream that port range will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN can t trigger it NBG4604 User s Guide Dynamic DNS 12 1 Overview Dynamic DNS DDNS services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address 12 2 What You Can Do Use the Dynamic DNS screen Section 12 4 on page 132 to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the NBG4604 12 3 What You Need To Know 12 3 1 Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address DynDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost
177. eral screen Table 73 Maintenance Sys OP Mode General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Operation Mode Router Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet This mode offers services such as a firewall or content filter Access Point Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network Apply Click Apply to save your settings Reset Click Reset to return your settings to the default Router Note If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the Internet NBG4604 User s Guide Language 23 1 Language Screen Use this screen to change the language for the Web Configurator display Click the language you prefer The Web Configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG4604 Figure 125 Language Language Language Selection English Deutsch Francais Espa ol amp Italiano L p fbr NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 23 Language NBG4604 User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs NBG4604 Access and Login nternet Access Resetting the NBG4604 to Its Factory Defaults Wireless Router AP Troubleshooti
178. eset to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 6 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen Use this screen to allow intra BSS networking and set the RTS CTS Threshold Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced The screen appears as shown Figure 48 Network Wireless LAN Advanced Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 2346 256 2346 Fragment Threshold 2346 256 2346 Beacon Interval 100 20 1024 ms DTIM Period 1 1 10 Preamble Type Oo Long Preamble 9 Short Preamble CTS Protection Auto O Always O None Tx Power 100 v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS Threshold Request To Send CTS Clear To Send handshake Enter a value between 0 and 2432 Fragmentatio The threshold number of bytes for the fragmentation boundary for n Threshold directed messages It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter an even number between 256 and 2346 This field is not available when Super Mode is selected Beacon When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon it includes with it a Interval beacon interval This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again The interval tells receiving devices on
179. ess of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying Occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpe tuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this sec tion must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation
180. ess policies tailored to your needs Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords 14 2 What You Can Do Use the Filter Section 14 4 on page 144 screen to restrict web features add keywords for blocking and designate a trusted computer 14 3 What You Need To Know Content filtering allows you to block certain web features such as cookies and or block access to specific web sites For example you can configure one policy that blocks John Doe s access to arts and entertainment web pages 14 3 1 Content Filtering Profiles A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features Restrict Web Features The NBG4604 can disable web proxies and block web features such as ActiveX controls Java applets and cookies NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 14 Content Filtering Keyword Blocking URL Checking The NBG4604 checks the URL s domain name or IP address and file path separately when performing keyword blocking The URL s domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the domain name is www zyxel com tw The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php the file path is news pressroom php Since the NBG4604 checks the URL s domain name or
181. et masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or O to 255 in decimal NBG4604 User s Guide L Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID Figure 128 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 we Um um SB SB SS KE M UM SSS Se e mm mmm m m m m m 9 How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is t
182. evice See Section 1 1 on page 21 for more information on which mode to choose Note The Sys OP Mode screen is read only if you are accessing from the admin level account 22 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 22 4 on page 197 to select how you connect to the Internet NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode 22 3 What You Need to Know Router A router connects your local network with another network such as the Internet The router has two IP addresses the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address Figure 120 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode WAN INT ERN Ey salig AP An AP extends one network and so has just one IP address All Ethernet ports on the AP have the same IP address To connect to the Internet another device such as a router is required Figure 121 IP Address in AP Mode NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 22 Sys OP Mode 22 4 General Screen Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet Figure 122 Maintenance Sys OP Mode General System Operation Mode Router access Point qQ Note Note The IP address will not be bounded in the QoS limitation Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Apply Reset If you select Router Mode the following pop up message window appears Figure 123 Maintenance Sys
183. existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type Retype to Type the new password again in this field Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 19 System 19 4 Time Setting Screen To change your NBG4604 s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the NBG4604 s time based on your local time zone Figure 108 Maintenance System Time Setting Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 00 21 06 Current Date 2009 01 01 Time and Date Setup C Manual New Time hh mm ss o a i IET New Date vyyy mmy dd 2o09 fi fi Get from Time Server auto User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London v E Daylight Savings Start Date First M End Date First z 2009 01 04 at p o clock of January 2009 01 04 at p o clock Apply Reset Sunday January Y Sunday he following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting LABEL
184. f Service attacks when activated click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box The NBG4604 s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The NBG4604 can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The NBG4604 is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The NBG4604 has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports which are used to physically separate the network into two areas The WAN Wide Area Network port attaches to the broadband cable or DSL modem to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access is not allowed by default unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall 13 4 General Firewall Screen Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG4604 s firewall and set up firewall logs Click Security gt Firewall to open the General screen Figure 77 Security Firewall General Firewall Setup IV Enable Firewall Apply Reset
185. figuration Apply User defined z 1 65535 Highest Reset See Appendix E on page 261 for a list of commonly used services and destination ports The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 31 Network Wireless LAN QoS Application Priority Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Type a description of the application priority Service The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM QoS Select a service from the drop down list box E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 e FTP File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files including large files that it may not be possible to send via e mail FTP uses port number 21 WWW The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser User Defined User defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications NBG4604 User s
186. first set of hour and minute min drop following times down boxes and select an end time using the second set of hour and 24 Hour minute min drop down boxes If you have chosen On earlier for the Format WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn off between the two times you enter in these fields If you have chosen Off earlier for the WLAN Status the Wireless LAN will turn on between the two times you enter in these fields Note Entering the same begin time and end time will mean the whole day Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 11 WDS Screen A Wireless Distribution System is a wireless connection between two or more APs Use this screen to set the operating mode of your NBG4604 to AP Bridge or Bridge Only and establish wireless links with other APs You need to know the MAC address of the peer device which also must be in bridge mode Note You must enable the same wireless security settings on the NBG4604 and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS tab The following screen opens with the Basic Setting set to Disabled and Security Mode set to No Security Figure 54 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS WDS Setup Basic Setting Disable v Local MAC Address 00 23 F8 26 24 F9 Phy Mode HTMIX v
187. frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel from the drop down list box The options vary depending on the frequency band and the country you are in Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels This option is only available if Auto Channel Selection is disabled Auto Channel Select this check box for the NBG4604 to automatically choose the Selection channel with the least interference Deselect this check box if you wish to manually select the channel using the Channel Section field Operating This displays the channel the NBG4604 is currently using Channel Channel Select whether the NBG4604 uses a wireless channel width of 20 or 40 Width MHz A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps Because not all devices support 40 MHz channels select Auto 20 40MHz to allow the NBG4604 to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically SSID Select a wireless LAN for which to configure security settings Selection f I The security settings only apply to the selected wireless LAN Enable Hide Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a SSID station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Enable Intra A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between BSS Traffic wireless clien
188. g pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors
189. ge and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP I P to open the TCP I P Control Panel Figure 149 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E Calculator Chooser ADSL Control and Status Control Panels Appearance f Favorites Apple Menu Options Key Caps AppleTalk GR Network Browser ColorSync ij Recent Applications Control Strip s Recent Documents DialAssist cif Remote Access Status Energy Saver Scrapbook Extensions Manager Sherlock 2 File Exchange Speakable Items File Sharing J General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Startup Disk TCP IP USB Printer Sharing NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figu
190. gement functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management 17 7 1 Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events Configuring SNMP To change your NBG4604 s SNMP settings click Management Remote MGMT gt SNMP tab The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings Figure 93 Management Remote MGMT SNMP SNMP Settings Ser
191. gned default MAC Address Clone the Select Clone the computer s MAC address I P Address and enter computer s the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning MAC address Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom P Address file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC _ Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 3 PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server creating a Virtual Private Network VPN using TCP IP based networks PPTP supports on demand multi protocol and virtual private networking over public networks such as the Internet NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation Figure 62 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPTP Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type PPTP User Name Password Retype to Confirm l M Nailed Up Connection Idle Timeout p in minutes PPTP Configuration Server IP Address Domain Connection ID Name o C Get automatically from ISP Use fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address
192. gure in the Bandwidth Management General screen General Configuration Use this screen to enable bandwidth management and assign uplink downlink limits You can use either one of the following types Priority Queue Enable bandwidth management to give uplink traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule This type does not apply to downlink traffic Bandwidth Allocation Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule Note You cannot apply both bandwidth management types at the same time Click Management gt Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen Figure 86 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt General Service Management Bandwidth Management Type Priority Queue Total Bandwidth Setting Uplink 30720 Kbps 30m bps Downlink 50720 Kbps 30 bps 7 Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Management Bandwidth MGMT General LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Management Bandwidth This field allows you to have NBG4604 apply bandwidth management Management Type Select Priority Queue or Bandwidth Allocation to enable bandwidth management Select Priority Queue to allocate bandwidth based on the pre define
193. gured If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG4604 your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range If you choose this option skip directly to Section 4 4 on page 44 Choose Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK security to configure a Pre Shared Key Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK respectively If you choose this option skip directly to Section 4 3 1 on page 44 Channel Selection The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g n wireless devices is called a channel The device will automatically select the channel with the least interference Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving Note The wireless stations and NBG4604 must use the same SSID channel ID WPA PSK if WPA PSK is enabled or WPA2 PSK if WPA2 PSK is enabled for wireless communication NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard 4 3 1 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security Choose Extend WPA PSK or Extend WPA2 PSK security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre Shared Key Figure 15 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Security STEP1 gt STEP2 gt STEP3 fa wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Wizard Step 2 Extend WPA PSK or WPA2
194. han 64 case sensitive HEX characters 0 9 A F The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA WPA2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The default is 600 seconds 10 minutes Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 5 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG4604 to give exclusive access to up to 16 devices Allow or exclude up to 16 devices from accessing the NBG4604 Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN To change your NBG4604 s MAC filter settings click Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 47 Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter I active Filter Action MAC Filter MAC Address Filter C allow C Deny 00 0
195. he system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a Shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words NBG4604 User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The NBG4604 icon is not an exact representation of your device NBG4604 Computer Notebook computer Server Modem Firewall J Telephone Switch Ce Router NBG4604 User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimmin
196. he LAN Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls Auto bridge Enable Auto bridge mode Select this option to have the NBG4604 switch to bridge mode automatically when the NBG4604 gets a WAN IP address in the range of 192 168 x y where x and y are from zero to nine no matter what the LAN IP address is Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh NBG4604 User s Guide LAN 9 1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server manage IP addresses and partition your physical network into logical networks Figure 64 LAN Setup WLAN The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 9 2 What You Can Do Use the IP screen Section 9 4 on page 115 to change your basic LAN settings NBG4604 User s Guide 113 Chapter 9 LAN 9 3 What You Need To Know The actual physical connection determines whether the NBG4604 ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 65 LAN and W
197. he Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODI NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements FICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application pro grams which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Sourc
198. he developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attrib uted erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the man ufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The sys tematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the pro gram non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS A
199. he host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 76 Subnet Mask Identifying Network Number 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 76 Subnet Mask Identifying Network Number 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 192 168 1 2 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number
200. his connection Bridge Connections mij Rename this connection view status of this connection Create Shortcut Change settings of this connection Properties NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP I P under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties Figure 145 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties l Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items ivi E Client for Microsoft Networks M JE File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Internet Protocol TCP IP Install EI i Properties LS Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 Thelnternet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP f you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an I P address automatically f you have a static IP address click Use the following I P Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields NBG4604 User s Guide 237 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Click Advanced Figure 146 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Pr
201. his list displays the keywords already added Click Add after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Delete Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply Clear All Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords Apply Click Apply to save your changes Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 14 5 Technical Reference 14 5 1 The following section contains additional technical information about the NBG4604 features described in this chapter Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking You can use commands to set how much of a website s URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking By default the NBG4604 checks the URL s domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking This means that the NBG4604 checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 14 Content Filtering For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php content filtering only searches for keywords within www zyxel com
202. his option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG4604 by probing for unused ports If you select this option the NBG4604 will not respond to port request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the NBG4604 unseen By default this option is not selected and the NBG4604 will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG4604 s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the NBG4604 reacts based on the firewall policy which by default is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet You can use the command sys firewall tcprst rst on off to change this policy When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet it drops the packet without sending a response packet NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall Table 53 Security Firewall Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save the settings Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 13 Firewall NBG4604 User s Guide Content Filtering 14 1 Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet acc
203. his port or range of ports to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Trigger The trigger port is a port or a range of ports that causes or triggers the NBG4604 to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 5 1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example The following is an example of trigger port forwarding Figure 74 Trigger Port Forwarding Process Example Jane s computer Real Audio Server 1 Janerequests a file from the Real Audio server port 7070 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT 2 11 5 2 Port 7070 is a trigger port and causes the NBG4604 to record Jane s computer IP address The NBG4604 associates Jane s computer IP address with the incoming port range of 6970 7170 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970 7170 The NBG4604 forwards the traffic to Jane s computer IP address Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio serv
204. ication Method There are two types of WEP authentication namely Open System and Shared Key Open system is implemented for ease of use and when security is not an issue The wireless station and the AP or peer computer do not share a secret key Thus the wireless stations can associate with any AP or peer computer and listen to any transmitted data that is not encrypted Shared key mode involves a shared secret key to authenticate the wireless station to the AP or peer computer This requires you to enable the wireless LAN security and use same settings on both the wireless station and the AP or peer computer Select Shared Key to have the NBG4604 authenticate only those Dicen clients that use Shared Key mode and have the correct WEP ey Select Auto to have the NBG4604 allow association with wireless clients that use Open System mode Data transfer is encrypted as long as the wireless client has the correct WEP key for encryption The NBG4604 authenticates wireless clients using Shared Key mode that have the correct WEP key ASCII HEX Keys 1 to 4t The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the NBG4604 and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you chose 64 bit WEP then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F If you chose 128 bit WEP then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F You must configure all four keys but
205. ices on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser WWW uses port 80 Telnet Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems Telnet uses port 23 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 SMTP port 25 NBG4604 User s Guide 1 57 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Table 60 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION BitTorrent BitTorrent is a free P2P peer to peer sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889 BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself It distributes files by corporation and trading that is the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file Gaming Online gaming services lets you play multiplayer games on the Internet via broadband technology One example is Microsoft s Xbox Live which uses port 3074 As of this writing your NBG4604 supports Xbox Playstation Battlenet and MSN Game Zone 16 5 4 Services and Port Numbers See Appendix E on
206. ick Apply to save your changes to NBG4604 Refresh Click Refresh to reload the previous configuration for this screen NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 11 1 Security Mode Static WEP Use this screen to configure the Static WEP security for your NBG4604 when it is in AP Bridge or Bridge Only mode Figure 55 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS Static WEP WDS Setup Basic Setting Security Security Mode WEP Encryption q Note Local MAC Address Remote MAC Address Disable ne 00 BB 97 53 03 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 Static WEP 64 bit WEP z ASCI Hex c Key 1 C Key 2 C Key 3 o Key 4 Apply 64 bit WEP Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 128 bit WEP Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for each Key 1 4 Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission Reset E 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Refer to Table 35 on page 97 for descriptions of other fields in this screen Table 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION WEP Encryption Select 64 bit WEP or 128 bit WEP to enable data encryption NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 36 Network gt Wireless LAN gt WDS Static WEP LABEL DESCRIPTION Authent
207. idential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded To change your NBG4604 s port forwarding settings click Network gt NAT gt Application The screen appears as shown Note If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT General screen the NBG4604 discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management NBG4604 User s Guide 125 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation NAT Refer to Appendix E on page 261 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Figure 72 Network NAT Application Add Application Rule D active Service Name Application User Defined v Local Port Range I M I Public Port Range M Server IP Address Apply Reset Application Rules Summary nad D toa Public mm mm EE Start End Port StartPort End Port A Eu Port 1 g d 2 g wi 3 y wi 4 g WI 5 y m 6 g w 7 7 9 g B Ou 10 8 g w The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Network gt N
208. ify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Enter the IP subnet mask here Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG4604 that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG4604 over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes Metric Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route NBG4604 User s Guide Bandwidth Management 16 1 Overview This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management and editing rules ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application In the figure below uplink traffic goes from the LAN device A to the WAN device B Bandwidth
209. ight displays the read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select DNS Relay to have the NBG4604 act as a DNS proxy The NBG4604 s LAN IP address displays in the field to the right read only The NBG4604 tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG4604 itself is the DNS server When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG4604 the NBG4604 forwards the query to the NBG4604 s system DNS server configured in the WAN gt Internet Connection screen and relays the response back to the computer You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers if you select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server that choice changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 6 Client List Screen The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information inc
210. igned domain name Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 3 Connection Wizard STEP 2 Wireless LAN Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen Figure 14 Wizard Step 2 Wireless LAN STEP STEP 2 STEP 3 f wireless LAN s the name given t rk It may be possible to see multipl orks from your home name that you will be able to recognize Name SSID ZyXEL WPS Security Extend VWPA2 PSK with customized key Channel Selection Chennel 11 2462MHz EY Em ASE EAE DI Beck Net gt OM ext NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Wizard Step 2 Wireless LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Name SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN If you change this field on the NBG4604 make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Security Select a Security level from the drop down list box Choose Auto WPA2 PSK to have the NBG4604 generate a pre shared key automatically After you click Next a screen pops up displaying the generated pre shared key Write down the key for use later when connecting other wireless devices to your network Click OK to continue Choose None to have no wireless LAN security confi
211. iguration To activate the network device ethO the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the ifconfig eth0 configuration file where etho is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor f you have a dynamic IP address enter dhcp in the BoorTPROTO field The following figure shows an example Figure 157 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO EVICE eth0 BOOT yes OOTPROTO dhcp SERCTL no ERDNS yes YPE Ethernet HuvuawWouyuU NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address f you have a static IP address enter static in the BOOTPROTO field Type IPADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and type NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Figure 158 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE eth0 ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMAS
212. ing Action Day Except for the following times C on off oft Everyday Tesis Fes c pese Tele hour oo min oo x hour oo v mim Ter GE li e x hour oo min os hour foo x min foo min 00 v hour 00 min Con off Tue foo x hour o0 x min oo v thou 00 min Con ott wed oo hour oo z min oo hour oo min C on off T Thu oo hour ao min w oo v hour oo min C on ott I Fri oo hour oo x min oo hour oo min C on of I sta oo hour oo min w oo hour oo min C on off C sun oo hour oo x min w oo hour oo z min Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Network gt Wireless LAN gt Scheduling LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Wireless Select this to enable Wireless LAN scheduling LAN Scheduling Action Select On or Off to specify whether the Wireless LAN is turned on or off This field works in conjunction with the Day and Except for the following times fields Day Select Everyday or the specific days to turn the Wireless LAN on or off If you select Everyday you can not select any specific days This field works in conjunction with the Except for the following times field Except for the Select a begin time using the
213. ings Control Panel Figure 142 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer eA My Documents e Outlook Express y Paint Files and Settings Transfer W 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures BJ Command Prompt EJ Acrobat Reader 4 0 Tour windows XP V Windows Movie Maker Q9 Help and Support Search All Programs gt 17 Run P Log Off Ko Turn Off Computer 5 untitled Paint NBG4604 User s Guide 235 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT Figure 143 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q 3 d I Search e Folders E Address G Control Panel Vg Control Panel a Y dg Hardware Je Switch to Category View Connections See Also A d Fonts Game Windows LIpdate Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Figure 144 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe x gt Ei Search i5 Folders i e Network Connections LANorHigh Speed Internet Network Tasks ocal Area Connection 5 Create a new nabled connection t s A Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte 9 Set up a home or small Disable office network im amp Disable this network a ril device Repair EN Repair t
214. iority Queue and Bandwidth Allocation tables Though both tables are described in this section you can only apply the rules in one table Fill out the table of the Bandwidth Management Type you selected in Section 16 4 on page 152 NBG4604 User s Guide 153 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management Click Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen Figure 87 Management Bandwidth MGMT Advanced Unlimited Priority Queue Local IP Address ooo Note The IP address will not be bounded in the QoS limitation Priority Queue a a a ee ee 1 EN hg m1 pez a a Lc NN RN Se eras eC n Em 08 0003 Gaming md High z Bon zl UE z Bon zl a E id a Both rare m Both gt ha High gt hd Both wi Bandwidth Allocation DINHCTITUNENDSTTUEANNUTTTCENNTTRRNCCNNRCTUS m ala sa w DO DIBDIO tr i 1 Du Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Queue Local IP Enter the IP address of the computer to which bandwidth management Address does not apply Priority Queue Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre defined service NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management
215. irmware Version V1 00 BWH 1 B4 Current Date Time 2009 01 01 00 02 02 WAN Information System Resource MAC Address 00 23 F8 26 24 FA CPU Usage Bos 5 57 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Memory Usage eco IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 System Setting EDI CE Firewall Enable LAN Information B eemi Disable MAC Address 00 23 F8 26 24 F9 BN o enable IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server WLAN Information MAC Address 00 23 F8 26 24 F9 Status On Channel Auto Channel Operating Channel 10 802 11 Mode 802 11 b g n SSID ils WPS Unconfigured DHCP Table Details Packet Statistics Details WLAN Station Status Details 6 2 2 1 Configure Your Notebook Note We use the ZyXEL M 302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client The screens may vary for different models 1 The NBG4604 supports IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g and IEEE 802 11n wireless clients Make sure that your notebook or computer s wireless adapter supports one of these standards 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a utility that you install on your computer See your wireless adapter s User s Guide for information on how to do that 3 After you ve installed the utility open it If you cannot see your utility s icon on your screen go to Start Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears The utility display
216. is number must consist of a 3 octet MAC address Enter the product class if this was provided by the network adminstrator Otherwise leave it at its default setting Model Name This displays the model name In this case it is NBG4604 and cannot be edited Device Connection Request Username Enter the username required for the ACS server to connect directly to the NBG4604 Password Enter the password required for the ACS server to connect directly to the NBG4604 Device Connection Request STUN Server STUN Username Enter the URL of the STUN server Enter the username required to log into the STUN server STUN Password Enter the password of the username used to log into the STUN server Logs Backup Click Backup to save a copy of the NBG4604 s ACS activity Clear Logs Click Clear Logs to delete the files containing a record of the NBG4604 s ACS activity Upload Certificate File Path Enter the path of the certificate file s location on your local computer or click the Browse button to open a browse dialog box to search for it CA Certificate Click Upload to copy the certicate listed in File Path to the NBG4604 Click Clear to remove the current CA Certificate from the device Client Certificate Click Upload to copy the certicate listed in File Path to the NBG4604 Click Clear to remove the current Client Certificate from the device
217. is enabled WDS Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System WDS on your NBG4604 LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask or to get the LAN IP address from a DHCP server Management ACS General Use this screen configure ACS Certificate Use this screen to upload security certificates to the device Maintenance System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names password and inactivity timer Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG4604 s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Log Settings Use this screen to activate syslog logging as well as the syslog server IP address Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4604 Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG4604 Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG4604 without turning the power off Sys OP General This screen allows you to select whether your device Mode acts as a Router or a Access Point Language This screen allows you to select the language you prefer NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode 5 4 Configuring Your Settings Use this section to configure your NBG4604 settings while in AP Mode 5 4 1 LAN Settings Click Network LAN to see the screen below Note If you change the IP address of th
218. its set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator amp your body vs Ai HE RSS ER 2 AA BEIR AUS ac A ZIRE BR JE REST AT AE PBB ASA EIE A EAR TUAE S CBE t e TPE RIE PEUR BARR AMC RM AE RC BG bal fr o REEL Sale MENTS FA WAE ERETT GHBARISUM RGA TERRE RUE FR PUR RR BRAE oka S _L SE BEER BER SN PE ae T RS 9 ARREN TBR IK Ba Be BS 52 ETB RSE PIAS ABE YARD EEE gt FACE Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian I CES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada NBG4604 User s Guide
219. itten to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copy right holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements e e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these con tractual assumptions directly i
220. k Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway NBG4604 User s Guide 173 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 174 Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 98 Network Connections EX Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe gt Q B yo Search Folders E Address e Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device Li Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this Disable LANorH Status Create Shortcut E ll Rename Properties nannerchan In the Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created Figure 99 Internet Connection Properties Z Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Show icon in notification area when connected NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure 100 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advances Settings
221. l office network Jh View workgroup computers Create Shortcut Rename Properties Other Places NBG4604 User s Guide 177 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 6 Right click on the icon for your NBG4604 and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG4604 Figure 106 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway roam General mj ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number Model Number Description ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 178 NBG4604 User s Guide System 19 1 Overview This chapter provides information on the System screens See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens 19 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 19 3 on page 179 to enter a name to identify the NBG4604 in the network and set the password Use the Time Setting screen Section 19 4 on page 181 to change your NBG4604 s time and date 19 3 System General Screen Use this screen to enter a name to identify the NBG4604 in the network and set the password Click Maintenance gt System The following screen displays Figure 107 Maintenance gt System gt General System Setup System Name NBG4604 Domain Name zyxel com Administrator Inactivity Timer 30 minutes 0 mea
222. le Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Pub lic License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modif
223. lear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modi fied by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speak ing a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library
224. low NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN 8 3 4 Auto Bridge In the rear panel of your NBG4604 you can see four LAN ports 1 to 4 and one WAN port The WAN port is for your Internet access connection and the LAN ports are for your network devices The WAN port has a different IP address from the LAN ports When you enable auto bridging in your NBG4604 all five ports 4 LAN ports and the WAN port share the same IP address as shown in the figure below Figure 59 Autobridging Example IP Address 192 168 1 20 This might happen if you put the NBG4604 behind a NAT router that assigns it this IP address When the NBG4604 is in auto bridge mode the NBG4604 acts as an AP and all the interfaces LAN WAN and WLAN are bridged In this mode your NAT DHCP server and firewall on the NBG4604 are not available You do not have to reconfigure them if you return to router mode Auto bridging only works under the following conditions The WAN IP must be 192 168 x y where x and y must be from zero to nine If the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address are in the same subnet but x or y is greater than nine the device operates in router mode with firewall available The device must be in Router Mode see Chapter 22 on page 195 for more information for auto bridging to become active NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN 8 4 Internet Connection Use this screen to change
225. luding IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of network clients using the NBG4604 s DHCP servers Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name Click Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List Note You can also view a read only client list by clicking the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server The following screen displays Figure 69 Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List DHCP Client Table Client List 192 168 1 33 aac oen ee T7 TWPC13262 01 00 1C C4 84 E0 4B Apply Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Network gt DHCP Server gt Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above Host Name This field displays the computer host name MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Reserve Select this check box in the DHCP Setup section to have the NBG4604 always assign the IP address es
226. management is applied before sending the packets out to the WAN Downlink traffic comes back from the WAN device B to the LAN device A Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out to LAN Figure 85 Bandwidth Management FTP HTTP Chat Email hj LS S l aai B You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to individual applications like Web FTP and E mail for example 16 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 16 4 on page 152 to enable bandwidth management and assign uplink downlink limits Use the Advanced screen Section 16 5 on page 153 to configure bandwidth management rules for the pre defined services and applications NBG4604 User s Guide 151 Chapter 16 Bandwidth Management 16 3 What You Need To Know 16 4 You can limit an application s uplink or downlink bandwidth This limit keeps the traffic from using up too much of the out going interface s bandwidth This way you can make sure there is bandwidth for other applications Use the following guidelines The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface LAN to WAN WLAN to WAN must be less than or equal to the Uplink value that you configure in the Bandwidth Management General screen The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port WAN to LAN WAN to WLAN must be less than or equal to the Downlink value that you confi
227. milar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or con cerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPY RIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIR
228. mple can access the NBG4604 Wireless LAN Scheduler You can schedule the times the Wireless LAN is enabled disabled Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NBG4604 You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the NBG4604 assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System support you can use a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider P Multicast IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The NBG4604 supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 Logging Use logs for troubleshooting You can view logs in the Web Configurator PPPoE PPPoE mimics a dial up Internet access connection PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network VPN The NBG4604 supports one PPTP connection at a time Universal Plug and Play UPnP
229. mpose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the fur ther restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the addi tional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way 8 Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a
230. ms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying dis tribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portio
231. n and restoring configuration appears as shown next Figure 115 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File Path Browse Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the Password will be 1234 LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 1 DHCP will be reset to server Reset 21 4 1 Backup Configuration Backup configuration allows you to back up save the NBG4604 s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your NBG4604 is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Click Backup to save the NBG4604 s current configuration to your computer 192 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools 21 4 2 Restore Configuration Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG4604 Table 72 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path
232. n click OK If you need TCP IP 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 232 NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect Configuring 1 Inthe Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab f your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically f you have a static IP address select Specify an I P address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 140 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties P 2 xl Bindings Advanced Netplos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below IV Detect connection to network media Cancel NBG4604 User s
233. n of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License C If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements 270 These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this Li
234. n screen on the NBG4604 3 Click the Start buttons or button next to the PIN field on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG4604 s WPS Station screen within two minutes The NBG4604 authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client This may take up to two minutes Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG4604 securely NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG4604 and wireless client ex NWD210N in this example by using PIN method Figure 31 Example WPS Process PIN Method Wireless Client NBG4604 Continuous Access Mode Is Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS statio Push Button Or input station s PIN numa note ed Setup k EX PIN 7 Manual input 25327519 WITHIN 2 MINUTES D Authentication by PIN nunmmmmmmmmmmm SECURITY INFO y COMMUNICATION NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 2 2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG4604 This example shows you how to configure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG4604 SSID SSID Example3 Channel 6 Security WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey Follow the steps belo
235. n this example for wireless communication B can access the Internet through the AP wirelessly Figure 29 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet 4 6 6 2 1 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG4604 and Wireless Client a i This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS This example uses the NBG4604 as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook Note The wireless client must be a WPS aware device for example a WPS USB adapter or PCI card NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 2 1 1 There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection This tutorial shows you how to do both Push Button Configuration PBC create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button See Section 6 2 1 1 on page 64 This is the easier method PIN Configuration create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client s PIN Personal Identification Number in the NBG4604 s interface See Section 6 2 1 2 on page 65 This is the more secure method since one device can authenticate the other Push Button Configuration PBC Make sure that your NBG4604 is turned on and that it is within range of your computer Make sure that you have installed the wireless client this example uses the NWD210N driver and utility in your notebook In the wireless client utility find the WPS settings Enable WPS and press the WPS
236. nal RADIUS database If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs 25 1 2 WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and only allows it to join the network if the password matches 3 The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 166 WPA 2 PSK Authentication PSK eG NU pons 2nd J a A A A B B HN 25 1 3 WPA 2 with RADIUS Applic
237. nd click Login Figure 4 Supervisor Account Login NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator 5 You should see a screen asking you to change your password highly recommended as shown next Type a new password and retype it to confirm and click Apply or click I gnore Note The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires default five minutes Simply log back into the NBG4604 if this happens 6 Select the setup mode you want to use Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet and Wireless setup Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG4604 s settings Select a language to go to the basic Web Configurator in that language To change to the advanced configurator see Chapter 23 on page 199 Please select Wizard or Advanced mode Engish f pe f oranes NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator 3 4 Resetting the NBG4604 If you forget your password or IP address or you cannot access the Web Configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG4604 to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved the password will be reset to 1234 and the IP address will be rese
238. nder this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor ver sion For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to cop
239. nel 4 802 11 b g n Ratata NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 19 Status Screen AP Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION Device Information System Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen It is for identification purposes Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created LAN Information MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device IP Address This shows the LAN port s IP address IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port s subnet mask DHCP This shows the LAN port s DHCP role Client WLAN Information MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device Status Channel This shows the current status of the Wireless LAN On or Off This shows the channel number which you select manually Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG4604 is currently using over the wireless LAN 802 11 Mode This shows the IEEE 802 11 standard that the NBG4604 supports Wireless clients must support the same standard in order to be able to connect to the NBG4604 SSID This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG4604 in the wireless LAN WPS This shows the WPS WiFi Protected Setup Status Click the status to display Network
240. net from the Show list Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list Figure 152 Macintosh OS X Network 8 0 Network mo a dL Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic m Show Built in Ethernet B AppleTalk Proxies Configure Using DHCP ik Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes NBG4604 User s Guide 243 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version Note Make sure you are logged in a
241. ng 24 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The NBG4604 does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG4604 2 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG4604 and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 3 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG4604 4 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor One of the LEDs does not behave as expected 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 5 on page 22 2 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 3 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables 4 Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor to the NBG4604 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor 24 2 NBG4604 Access and Login don t know the IP address of my NBG4604 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the NBG4604 by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do this in most Windows computers click Start Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG4604 it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet bro
242. ning at full load and the throughput is not going to improve anymore If you want some applications to have more throughput you should turn off other applications Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG4604 is using System Setting Firewall This shows whether the firewall is active or not ES NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Status Screen Router Mode continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth This shows whether bandwidth management is active or not Management UPnP This shows whether UPnP is active or not Interface Status Interface This displays the NBG4604 port types The port types are WAN LAN and WLAN Status For the LAN and WAN ports this field displays Down line is down or Up line is up or connected For the WLAN it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N A when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N A when the WLAN is disabled Summary DHCP Table Use this screen to view current DHCP client information Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently asso
243. ns information about configuring general log settings and viewing the NBG4604 s logs The Web Configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG4604 s logs in one location 20 2 What You Can Do Use the View Log screen Section 20 4 on page 186 to see the logs for the categories such as system maintenance system errors access control allowed or blocked web sites blocked web features and so on Use the Log Settings screen Section 20 5 on page 187 to send copies of the NBG4604 syslog files to a dedicated syslog server 20 3 What You Need to Know An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted web features such as cookies active X and so on Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black Alerts are e mailed as soon as they happen Logs may be e mailed as soon as the log is full see Log Schedule Selecting many alert and or log categories especially Access Control may result in many e mails being sent NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs 20 4 View Log Screen Use the View Log screen to see the logged messages for the NBG4604 Options include logs about system maintenance system errors access control allowed or blocked web sites block
244. ns no timeout Password Setup Old Password New Password Retype to Confirm Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide 1 79 Chapter 19 System The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Maintenance System General LABEL DESCRIPTION System Setup System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4604 in an Ethernet network It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field see the chapter about wizard setup for how to find your computer s name This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Administrator Inactivity Timer Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idle not recommended Password Setup Change your NBG4604 s password recommended using the fields as shown Old Password Type the default password or the
245. ntents cA e herd PRINT TITULI TELS 197 Chapter 23 199 2d bandgudage Sell uote ete aptae Rehd tablet MORE Pod UR dameander Pepe ped etoile 199 Chapter 24 sl ul M 201 24 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS irisscan 201 24 2 NBG4GO4 Access and LOI issue su cone enrciune apenkidc rl UD eo adn dA KU Rat cu ER an 202 wo Bl ID ACCESS P 204 24 4 Resetting the NBG4604 to Its Factory Defaults sssssssseeeennne 205 24 5 Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting 12st cassetta aa Letra da ano ett rdias rinser UN dpa need 206 Chapter 25 ins ed 209 ec aii m 211 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting essesecsseseeeeneeen 213 Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions ssssusss 223 Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address eeeseeeesseeeeeee 231 EN E dpi ee ure MED OT S 248 Appendix D Wireless LANS t M I 249 25 1 2 WPAGD PSK Applicaton Example ueceeco trio Patre cor bue FH cotton Eu eR Rae psa s iE aaa 259 25 1 3 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example sese 259 Append E SENTOS us id eM E LIE E D M 261 PETOT E roues uM qu M EE UM e 265 Appendix F Open Software Announcements
246. o ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPY RIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS
247. o configure security settings manually Use the WPS Station screen Section 7 9 on page 94 to add a wireless station using WPS Use the Scheduling screen Section 7 10 on page 95 to set the times your wireless LAN is turned on and off Use the WDS screen Section 7 11 on page 96 to set the operating mode of your NBG4604 to AP Bridge or Bridge Only and establish wireless links with other APs 7 3 What You Should Know Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set I Dentity f two wireless networks overlap they should use different channels Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 3 1 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 3 1 1 SSID Normally the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the AP does
248. oadband modem at the subscriber s site By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4604 rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG4604 does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LAN s computers will have Internet access Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE Figure 18 Wizard Step 3 PPPoE Connection STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 ffi Internet Configuration Enter your Internet Service Provider s connection settings Connection Type PPP over Ethernet Password back net Jet The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Wizard Step 3 PPPoE Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameter for Internet Access Connection Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial up connection Type Service Name Type the name of your service provider User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 4 Connection Wizard Table 12 Wizard Step 3 PPPoE Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Type the password associated with the user name above Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 4 3 PPTP Connection Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from
249. oadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 81 Subnet2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 64 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 82 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Table 83 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 83 Subnet 4 continued IP SUBNET MASK LAST OCTET BIT NETWORK NUMBER VALUE Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subne
250. of Service QoS 90 R RADIUS 254 Shared Secret Key 255 RADIUS Message Types 255 RADIUS Messages 255 RADIUS server 79 registration product 286 related documentation 3 NBG4604 User s Guide Index Remote management 159 and NAT 160 and the firewall 159 limitations 160 remote management session 160 system timeout 160 remote management FTP 162 Telnet 162 Reset button 30 194 Reset the device 30 Restore configuration 193 RF Radio Frequency 210 RFC 3489 167 Roaming 89 RTS Request To Send 252 RTS Threshold 251 252 RTS CTS Threshold 78 89 S safety warnings 8 Scheduling 95 Security Parameters 260 Service and port numbers 158 Service Set 82 Service Set IDentification 82 Service Set IDentity See SSID services and port numbers 261 and protocols 261 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 163 164 agents 164 Get 164 GetNext 164 Manager 164 managers 164 MIB 164 network components 164 Set 165 Trap 165 versions 163 SSID 32 78 82 stateful inspection firewall 135 Static DHCP 118 Static Route 148 Status 30 subnet 213 Subnet Mask 115 subnet mask 50 214 subnetting 217 Summary DHCP table 35 Packet statistics 36 Wireless station status 37 syntax conventions 6 Sys Op Mode 195 System General Setup 179 System Name 180 System name 40 vs computer name System restart 194 T TCP IP configuration 117 Telnet 162 Temperature 209 Time setting 181 trigger port 128
251. of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties NOTE Some components of this product incorporate source code covered under the open source code licenses To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses please check ZyXEL Technical Support support zyxel com tw to get it NBG4604 User s Guide 267 Appendix F Open Software Announcements Open Sourced Components Linux Kernel 2 6 21 2 6 21 http www kernel org busybox 1 7 5 1 7 5 http www busybox net libesmtp 1 0 4 1 0 4 http www stafford uklinux net libesmtp libupnp 1 6 0 1 6 0 http pupnp sourceforge net pcre 6 7 6 7 http www pcre org igmpproxy 0 1 beta2 0 1 beta2 http sourceforge net projects igmpproxy dnsmasq 2 39 2 39 http thekelleys org uk dnsmasq doc html iproute2 2 6 16 2 2 6 16 http www linuxfoundation org en Net Iproute2 rp pppoe 3 8 3 8 http www roaringpenguin com products pppoe iptables 1 3 8 1 3 8 http www netfilter org projects iptables index html updatedd 2 6 2 6 http freshmeat net projects updatedd linuxigd 1 1 http linux igd sourceforge net index php wireless tools 2 8 2 8 ht
252. ominently vis ible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this crite rion NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements 1 Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that lan guage The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any
253. on on the fields in the WAN screens 8 2 What You Can Do Use the Internet Connection screen Section 8 4 on page 105 to enter your ISP information and set how the computer acquires its IP DNS and WAN MAC addresses Use the Advanced screen Section 8 5 on page 111 to enable multicasting configure Windows networking and bridge NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN 8 3 What You Need To Know The information in this section can help you configure the screens for your WAN connection as well as enable disable some advanced features of your NBG4604 8 3 1 Configuring Your Internet Connection Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol To set up a WAN connection to the Internet you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP Internet Service Provider If your ISP offers a dial up Internet connection using PPPoE PPP over Ethernet or PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol they should also provide a username and password and service name for user authentication WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the NBG4604 which makes it accessible from an outside network It is used by the NBG4604 to communicate with other devices in other networks It can be static fixed or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the NBG4604 tries to access the Internet If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address they should
254. oprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read lt http www gnu org philos ophy why not lgpl html gt This Product includes libupnp 1 6 0 pcre 6 7 ppp 2 4 3 under BSD license BSD Copyright c dates as appropriate to package The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or with out modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the University nor of the Laboratory may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOS E ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBU TORS BE LIABLE
255. or malicious traffic Enable the firewall to protect your LAN computers from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access between the LAN and WAN By default the firewall allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all of the networks blocks traffic that originates on the other networks from going to the LAN The following figure illustrates the default firewall action User A can initiate an IM Instant Messaging session from the LAN to the WAN 1 Return traffic for this session is also allowed 2 However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 3 and 4 Figure 76 Default Firewall Action NBG4604 User s Guide 135 Chapter 13 Firewall 13 2 What You Can Do Use the General screen Section 13 4 on page 137 to enable or disable the NBGA4604 s firewall Use the Access Control Rule Section 13 5 on page 137 screen to view the configured access control rules and add edit or remove a rule Use the Services screen Section 13 6 on page 140 screen enable service blocking enter delete modify the services you want to block and the date time you want to block them 13 3 What You Need To Know The NBG4604 s firewall feature physically separates the LAN and the WAN and acts as a secure gateway for all data passing between the networks 13 3 1 About the NBG4604 Firewall The NBG4604 firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial o
256. order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of Authentication This appendix discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP Consult your network administrator for more information EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MD5 authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station The wireless station proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text NBG4604 User s Guide 255 Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP TLS However MD5 authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP en
257. otocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 6 If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Click OK when finished Figure 147 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP
258. page 261 for commonly used services and port numbers NBG4604 User s Guide Remote Management 17 1 Overview This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which NBG4604 interface if any from which computers You may manage your NBG4604 from a remote location via LAN only LAN and WAN Note When you configure remote management to allow management from the LAN and WAN in the options above you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules Note The Remote MGMT screens are accessible to the supervisor level account only Note The Remote MGMT screens should be configured with Access Control Rule Section 13 5 on page 137 for applying remote management from WAN Internet 17 2 What You Can Do Use the WWW screen Section 17 4 on page 161 to change your NBG4604 s World Wide Web settings Use the Telnet screen Section 17 5 on page 162 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet to manage the NBG4604 Use the FTP screen Section 17 6 on page 162 to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use FTP to access the NBG4604 Your NBG4604 can act as an SNMP agent which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the NBG4604 through the network Use the
259. part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 77 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 mask 24 bit 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 mask 29 bit 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 24 mask 8 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example NBG4604 User s Guide ns Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 78
260. personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen Figure 133 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet M zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 NBG4604
261. puter s MAC the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning address IP Once it is successfully configured the address will be copied to the rom Address file It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file Set WAN MAC Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 2 PPPoE Encapsulation The NBG4604 supports PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial up connection using PPPoE For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example Radius NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG4604 rather than individual compute
262. r model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks Authentication Determines the identity of the users Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless station and the network RADIUS server NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access e Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In
263. rate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically WPA2 AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC TKIP makes it much more difficult to decode data on a Wi Fi network than WEP making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier to use consistent single alphanumeric password User Authentication WPA or WPA2 applies IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an exter
264. rd associated with the user name above Retype to Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is Confirm correctly Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time Connection out Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server DNS Servers First DNS Server Second DNS Server Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information and the NBG4604 s WAN IP address The field to the right displays the read only DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns Select User Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server Enter the DNS server s IP address in the field to the right If you chose User Defined but leave the IP address set to 0 0 0 0 User Defined changes to None after you click Apply If you set a second choice to User Defined and enter the same IP address the second User Defined changes to None after you click Apply Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port s MAC address by using the NBG4604 s MAC address copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assi
265. re 150 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP Li TCP IP Comect vla m Setup Ethernet gt DHCP Client ID Configure IP Address Subnet mask Router address Name server addr Using DHCP Server o will be supplied by server 7 lt will be supplied by server gt lt will be supplied by server gt x will be supplied by server Search comans 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 151 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu Grab File Edit Capt About This Mac System Preferences Epeem UG 2 Click Network in the icon bar Select Automatic from the Location list Select Built in Ether
266. rize the NBG4604 s hardware and firmware features Table 74 Hardware Features Dimensions W x D x H 140 mm x 110 mm x 30 mm Weight Power Specification 190g Input 100 240 AC 50 60 Hz Output 12 V DC 1A Ethernet ports Auto negotiating 10 100 1000 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode Auto crossover Use either crossover or straight through Ethernet cables 4 5 Port Switch A combination of switch and router makes your NBG4604 a cost effective and viable network solution You can add up to four computers to the NBG4604 without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port You can add up to five computers to the NBG4604 when you connect to the Internet in AP mode Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub LEDs PWR LAN1 4 WAN WLAN WPS Reset Button The reset button is built into the rear panel Use this button to restore the NBG4604 to its factory default settings Press for 1 second to restart the device Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings Environment WPS button Press the WPS on two WPS enabled devices within 120 seconds for a security enabled wireless connection Antenna The NBG4604 is equipped with a 2dBi 2 4GHz detachable antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network Operation Temperature 09 C 409 C 329F 1042F Humidity 20 90 Storage En
267. rs the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the NBG4604 does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation Figure 61 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type PPP over Ethernet Service Name optional User Name aa Password oa Retype to Confirm 7 M Nailed Up Connection Idle Timeout poo in minutes DNS Servers First DNS Server FromisP z Second DNS Server Fromise v EE WAN MAC Address e Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address p 0 0 0 C Set WAN MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Select PPP over Ethernet if you connect to your Internet via dial up Type Service Name Type the PPPoE service name provided to you PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP NBG4604 User s Guide 107 Chapter 8 WAN Table 39 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection PPPoE Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Type the passwo
268. rsion that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accom pany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distri
269. s computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at startup from a server Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise Clear it to disable the NBG4604 acting as a DHCP server When configured as a server the NBG4604 provides TCP IP configuration for the clients If not DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computers must be manually configured When set as a server fill in the following four fields IP Pool Starting Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool for LAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 10 5 Advanced Screen This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG4604 sends to the DHCP clients NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server To change your NBG4604 s static DHCP settings click Network gt DHCP Server 7 Advanced The following screen displays Figure 68 Network gt DHCP Server gt Advanced Static DHCP Table ol 1 foo 00 00 00 00 00 foooo 2 oo 00 00 00 00 00 ooo 00 00 00 00 0
270. s such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen You may still configure and store keys here but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled Note EAP MD5 cannot be used with dynamic WEP key exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but for public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 88 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity
271. s a list of APs within range as shown in the example screen below 68 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Select SSID Example3 and click Connect Figure 34 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t Available Network List Site Information Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 119 ZyXEL YZU Channel amp ZyXEL test Security PA PSK MAC Address 00 40 C5 CD 1F 64 Surveyed at 11 46 38 Qj zi 5 Select WPA PSK and type the security key in the following screen Click Next Figure 35 Security Settings gt Encryption Type WPA PSK gt Pre Shared Key TrisismywWPA PSkpre sharedkey Back T Next Exit 6 The Confirm Save window appears Check your settings and click Save to continue Figure 36 Confirm Save gt Network Name SSID SSID Example3 gt Network Type Infrastructure Network Mode 802 11b g gt Channel Auto Security WPA PSK Back Save Exit NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection see the Troubleshooting section of this User s Guide Figure 37 Link Status gt Profile Name Transmit Rate 2 Kbps gt Network Name SSID 5SID Example3 Receive Rate 0 Kbps gt AP MAC Address 00 A0 C5 CD 1F 64 Authentication None gt Network Type Infrastructure Net
272. s being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly jloup gzip org Mark Adler madler alumni caltech edu NBG4604 User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This
273. s connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG4604 s new settings Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen Figure 43 Network Wireless LAN General Es Wireless Setup Y Enable Wireless LAN Enable Wireless LAN 1 Name SSID 1 ZyXEL Channel Selection v Auto Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel 4 Channel Width 20 MHz Y Security SSID Selection ZyXEL Enable Hide SSID Y Enable Intra BSS Traffic Security Mode No Security v Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 24 Network Wireless LAN General LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Click the check box to activate wireless LAN Wireless LAN Enable Set the number of wireless LANs to enable on this device up to a Wireless LAN maximum of 4 1 Name SSID Service Set IDentity The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated Wireless stations associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit ASCII characters for the wireless LAN There is one Name SSID field for each wireless LAN enabled on this device Channel Set the operating
274. s screen to configure a bandwidth management MGMT service type Advanced Use this screen to configure bandwidth management for specific types of applications Remote WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface s MGMT and from which IP address es users can use HTTP to manage the NBG4604 Telnet Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet to manage the NBG4604 FTP Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use FTP to access the NBG4604 SNMP Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can access the SNMP agent on the NBG4604 ACS Use this screen configure ACS and upload security certificates to the device UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG4604 Maintenance System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names password and inactivity timer Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG4604 s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Log Settings Use this screen to activate syslog logging as well as the syslog server IP address Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG4604 Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG4604 Restart This
275. s the root administrator Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 153 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices Network Configuration File Profile Help B B x New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices Hardware DNS Hosts atc You may configure network devices associated with d oO physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be T associated with a single piece of hardware Profile Status Device Nickname Type X Inactive ethO etho Ethernet NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix C Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 2 Double click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown Figure 154 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General Ethernet Device 5x General Route Hardware Device Nickname ethO lt Activate device when computer starts Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname optional 4 Automatically obtain DNS information from provider Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Address
276. s useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable NBG4604 User s Guide 273 Appendix F Open Software Announcements 274 source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third par ties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section
277. s using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or NBG4604 User s Guide 251 Appendix D Wireless LANs wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other Figure 165 RTS CTS eig d CTS Range Station AP oa NN oe AN P d AP M a orn f diim i A i A Dee LJ m a a ES ACK canm ren Stations A and B do not 7 po i Station A T gt hear each other They 77 can hearthe AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is already using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between
278. screen allows you to reboot the NBG4604 without turning the power off Sys OP General This screen allows you to select whether your device acts Mode as a Router or a Access Point Language This screen allows you to select the language you prefer 3 6 2 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NBG4604 s LAN as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a NBG4604 User s Guide EJ Chapter 3 The Web Configurator server the NBG4604 provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If DHCP service is disabled you must have another DHCP server on that network or else the computer must be manually configured Click the DHCP Table Details hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here relates to your DHCP status The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the NBG4604 s DHCP server Figure 6 Summary DHCP Table DHCP Table SL NENNT TT 192 168 1 33 TWPC12731 00 19 cb 04 80 le 2 192 168 1 35 twpci2116 00 02 63 56 16 9d Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Summary DHCP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address Host Name This field displays
279. server so that the end user need not be worried about it 170 NBG4604 User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP 18 1 Overview This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the Web Configurator Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use 18 2 What You Can Do Use the UPnP screen Section 18 4 on page 172 to enable UPnP on the NBG4604 18 3 What You Need to Know How do know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following NBG4604 User s Guide 1 71 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Dynami
280. ss LAN WLAN in the same subnet See the figure below for an example Figure 24 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode WLAN LAN 5 2 Setting your NBG4604 to AP Mode 1 Log into the Web Configurator if you haven t already See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this NBG4604 User s Guide 55 Chapter 5 AP Mode 2 To set your NBG4604 to AP Mode go to Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General and select Access Point Figure 25 Maintenance gt Sys OP Mode gt General General System Operation Mode Router C Access Point q Note Note The IP address will not be bounded in the QoS limitation Router In this mode the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL Cable Modem PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port Apply Reset 3 A pop up appears providing information on this mode Click OK in the pop up message window See Section 22 4 on page 197 for more information on the pop up Click Apply Your NBG4604 is now in AP Mode Note You have to log in to the Web Configurator again when you change modes 5 3 Status Screen AP Mode Click on Status The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode Figure 26 Status Screen AP Mode System Status ZyxELEF4C System Up Time 0 0 47 V1 00 BWH 1 84 Current Date Teme 2009 01 01 00 00 48 00 23 8 26 24 9 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 Nene 00 23 58 26 24 9 On Auto Chan
281. st have its own unique IP address Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Firewall You can configure firewall on the NBG4604 for secure Internet access When the firewall is on by default all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example Content Filter The NBG4604 blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering You can also subscribe to category based content filtering that allows your NBG4604 to check web sites against an external database NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 25 Product Specifications Table 75 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTP or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for exa
282. t Table 84 Eight Subnets SUBNET SUBNET FIRST ADDRESS LAST ss ADDRESS 7 1 30 31 3 zm 33 62 63 Bs 8 M 9 2 OE 97 126 127 5 128 129 ros unie lic eos L lier 114580 SE 3 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 85 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO PORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 4 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 hn NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 86 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO PORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NOS S PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 2
283. t thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the forego NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix F Open Software Announcements ing Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material Acknowledgements licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the Software and your use of such mate rial is governed by their respective terms ZyXEL has provided as part of the Software package access to certain third party soft ware as a convenience To the extent that the Software contains third party software ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software Please contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidenti ality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confiden tial information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ens
284. t to 192 168 1 1 3 4 1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button 1 Make sure the power LED is on 2 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart reboot the NBG4604 3 Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4604 back to its factory default configurations 3 5 Navigating the Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the Web Configurator from the Status screen in Router Mode and AP Mode 3 6 Status Screen Router Mode Click on Status The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator For information on the status screen in AP Mode see Chapter 5 on page 56 Figure 5 Status Screen Router Mode Device Information System Name Firmware Version WAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP LAN Information MAC Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask DHCP WLAN Information MAC Address Status Channel Operating Channel 802 11 Mode SSID WPS ZyXELSFAC V1 00 BWH 1 B4 00 23 F8 26 24 FA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Client 00 23 F8 26 24 F9 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Server 00 23 F8 26 24 F9 On Auto Channel 10 802 11 b g n Unconfigured LAN WLAN B Refresh Now Refresh Interval None iv System Up Time Current Date Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage System Setting Firewall
285. t you specify to access the NBG4604 using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 The FTP Screen You can use FTP File Transfer Protocol to upload and download the NBG4604 s firmware and configuration files Please see the User s Guide chapter on firmware NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management and configuration file maintenance for details To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come To change your NBG4604 s FTP settings click Management gt Remote MGMT gt FTP The screen appears as shown Figure 91 Management Remote Management FTP FTP Server Port B Server Access LAN X LAN LAN amp WAN Disable Secured Client IP Address all Selected qQ Note You may also need to create a Firewall rule Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Management gt Remote Management gt FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed However you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG4604 using this service Secured
286. ted by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures 4 Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices
287. the wireless LAN The NBG4604 is negotiating a WPS connection with a wireless client Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed WPS Green On The NBG4604 is ready but is not sending receiving data through the WPS connection Blinking The NBG4604 is sending receiving data through the WPS connection Off The WPS connection is not ready or has failed WAN Green On The NBG4604 has a successful 10 100 1000 MB WAN connection Blinking The NBG4604 is sending receiving data through the WAN Off The WAN connection is not ready or has failed LAN 1 4 Green On The NBG4604 has a successful 10 100 1000 MB Ethernet connection Blinking The NBG4604 is sending receiving data through the LAN Off The LAN is not connected WPS Button Press this button for 1 second to set up a wireless connection via WiFi Protected Setup with another WPS enabled client You must press the WPS button on the client side within 120 seconds for a successful connection NBG4604 User s Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introduction NBG4604 User s Guide The WPS Button 2 1 Overview Your NBG4604 supports WiFi Protected Setup WPS which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network WPS is an industry standard specification defined by the WiFi Alliance WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security without having to configure security settings manually Ea
288. ting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation This field displays Down when the line is disconnected For the WLAN it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled TxPkts This is the number of transmitted packets on this port RxPkts This is the number of received packets on this port Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Tx B s This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port RxB s X This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port System Up Time This is the total time the NBG4604 has been on Poll Interval s Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval s field Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics 3 6 4 Summary WLAN Station Status Click the WLAN Station Status Details hyperlink in the Status screen View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4604 in the Association List Association means that a wireless client for example your NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 3 The Web Configurator network or computer with a wireless network card has connected successfully to the AP or wireless
289. tion Restore Error System Restore Restore configuration error The configuration file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid configuration file Click Help for more information Return Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user entered configuration information and returns the NBG4604 to its factory defaults You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG4604 Refer to the chapter about introducing the Web Configurator for more information on the RESET button 21 5 Restart Screen System restart allows you to reboot the NBG4604 without turning the power off Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Click Restart to have the NBG4604 reboot This does not affect the NBG4604 s configuration Figure 119 Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS or PWR LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Restart NBG4604 User s Guide Sys OP Mode 22 1 Overview The Sys OP Mode System Operation Mode function lets you configure whether your NBG4604 is a router or AP You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your d
290. tisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program 13 Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU Gen eral Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a prox
291. to the MAC address es and host name s After you click Apply the MAC address and IP address also display in the Advanced screen where you can edit them Apply Click Apply to save your settings Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 10 DHCP Server 122 NBG4604 User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT 11 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG4604 NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet For example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original P source address in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The NBG4604 keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 70 NAT Example NAT TABLE E LAN 192 168 1 10 W 192 188 143 SiS Public IP AN 2 168 1 12 192 168 1 13 192 188 1 12 E 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 10 IL Poot 192 168 1 10 For more information on IP ad
292. tp www hpl hp com personal Jean Tourrilhes Linux Tools html bridge utils 1 2 12 http www linuxfoundation org en Net Main Page pptp client 1 7 1 1 7 1 http pptpclient sourceforge net ppp 2 4 3 2 4 3 http ppp samba org udhcp 0 9 9 pre 0 9 9 pre http sources busybox net index py trunk udhcp web index html revision 9967 ez ipupdate 3 0 11b8 3 0 11b8 http ez ipupdate com uboot 1 1 3 1 1 3 http www denx de wiki U Boot uclibc 0 9 29 0 9 29 http www uclibc org mtd utils 1 2 1 2 http git infradead org zlib 1 2 3 1 2 3 http www zlib net usb_modeswitch 0 9 7 0 9 7 http www draisberghof de usb_modeswitch Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any pur pose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes Linux Kernel 2 6 21 busybox 1 7 5 libesmtp 1 0 4 igmpproxy 0 1 beta2 dnsmasq 2 39 iproute2 2 6 16 rp pppoe 3 8 iptables 1 3 8 updatedd 2 6 linuxigd 1 wireless_tools 2 8 bridge utils 1 2 pptp client 1 7 1 ppp 2 4 3 udhcp 0 9 9 pre ez ipupdate 3 0 11b8 uboot 1 1 3 mtd utils 1 2 usb_modeswitch 0 9 7 software under GPL 2 0 license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temp
293. ts or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 24 Network Wireless LAN General LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Select No Security Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK to add security on this wireless network The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device After you select to use a security additional options appears in this screen See 7 4 2 and 7 4 3 sections Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without authentication Note If you enable the WPS function only No Security WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK are available in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen 7 4 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without Note If you do an
294. ttings See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User s Guide for more information to select Router Mode set up URL keyword blocking but can still access a website that should be blocked NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL customize the keyword blocking using commands See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter can access the Internet but cannot open my network folders In the Network gt LAN gt Advanced screen make sure Allow between LAN and WAN is checked This is not checked by default to keep the LAN secure If you still cannot access a network folder make sure your account has access rights to the folder you are trying to open can access the Web Configurator after switched to AP mode When you change from router mode to AP mode your computer must have an IP address in the range between 192 168 1 3 and 192 168 1 254 Refer to Appendix C on page 231 for instructions on how to change your computer s IP address NBG4604 User s Guide 207 Chapter 24 Troubleshooting NBG4604 User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summa
295. tton To reset the NBG4604 1 Make sure the power LED is on NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 2 Press the RESET button for longer than 1 second to restart reboot the NBG4604 3 Press the RESET button for longer than five seconds to set the NBG4604 back to its factory default configurations If the NBG4604 restarts automatically wait for the NBG4604 to finish restarting and log in to the Web Configurator The password is 1234 If the NBG4604 does not restart automatically disconnect and reconnect the NBG4604 s power Then follow the directions above again 24 5 Wireless Router AP Troubleshooting cannot access the NBG4604 or ping any computer from the WLAN wireless AP or router 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG4604 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802 11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG4604 4 Make sure your computer with a wireless adapter installed is within the transmission range of the NBG4604 5 Check that both the NBG4604 and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG4604 7 Make sure you allow the NBG4604 to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface Check your remote management se
296. tw Full Path URL Checking Full path URL checking has the NBG4604 check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL For example with the URL www zyxel com tw news pressroom php full path URL checking searches for keywords within www zyxel com tw news Usethe ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s full path File Name URL Checking Filename URL checking has the NBG4604 check all of the characters in the URL For example filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL Www zyxel com tw news pressroom php Usethe ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 disable enable command to extend or not extend the keyword blocking search to include the URL s complete filename NBG4604 User s Guide Static Route 15 1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG4604 Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the NBG4604 has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the NBG4604 knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the NBG4604 is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn t know that there is a route through the same remote node Router 1 via gateway Router 2 The static routes are for you to tell the NBG4604 about the networks beyond the remote nodes
297. uide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well 4 NBG4604 User s Guide About This User s Guide Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device NBG4604 User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The NBG4604 may be referred to as the NBG4604 the device the product or t
298. uration for this screen 7 4 3 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list Figure 46 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Enable Wireless LAN Name SSID 1 Channel Selection Operating Channel Channel Width Security SSID Selection Enable Hide SSID Y Enable Intra BSS Traffic Security Mode Pre Shared Key Group Key Update Timer Q Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled 1 ZyXEL V Auto Channel Selection Channel 4 20 MHz wv ZyXEL M WPA PSK M G Asci O Hex 600 In Seconds NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Network Wireless LAN General WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK in the Compatible Security Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG4604 even when the NBG4604 is using WPA2 PSK Pre Shared Key Group Key Update Timer WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password for authentication Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive ASCII characters including spaces and symbols Type a pre shared key less t
299. ure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Soft ware for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRAN TIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUEN TIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAM AGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
300. use the Network Identification Wizard to join a domain and create a local user account click Network ID To rename this computer or join a domain click Change 4 2 2 Domain Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the NBG4604 via DHCP Click Next to configure the NBG4604 for Internet access Figure 13 Wizard Step 1 System Information STEPI STEP 2 STEP 3 ffl System Information vour router on the network This information is optional and you o the router If you ar main Name manually i d is normally left blank cco NBG4604 User s Guide LEN Chapter 4 Connection Wizard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Wizard Step 1 System Information LABEL DESCRIPTION System System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG4604 in an Ethernet Name network Enter a descriptive name This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Type the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank Name the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP ass
301. ut given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in convey ing all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copy righted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed sec tion 10 makes it unnecessary 3 Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effec
302. ver Port Server Access SNMP Version Secured Client IP Address Enable SNMP Read Community 161 LAN AX LAN LAN amp WAN Disable Al Selected 0 0 Set Community System Location System Contact Trap Settings F Trap Settings Trap Manager IP Trap Community wc 5 5 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Management gt Remote MGMT gt SNMP LABEL SNMP Settings DESCRIPTION Server Port The SNMP agent listens on port 161 by default If you change the SNMP server port to a different number on the NBG4604 for example 8161 then you must notify people who need to access the NBG4604 SNMP agent to use the same port Server Access Select the interface s through which a computer may access the NBG4604 using this service Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to access the SNMP agent on the NBG4604 Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you NBG4604 User s Guide specify to access the SNMP agent Chapter 17 Remote Management Table 64 Management gt Remote MGMT gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Settings Enable SNMP Select this to enable SNMP on this device SNMP version Select the SNMP version that corresponds the SNMP used by
303. view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG4604 5 3 1 Navigation Panel Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG4604 features in AP Mode The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode Figure 27 Menu AP Mode p BH suns Wireless LAN LAN System Logs Tools Sys OP Mode Language The following table describes the sub menus Table 20 Menu AP Mode LINK TAB FUNCTION Status This screen shows the NBG4604 s general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the wizard and summary statistics tables Network NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 5 AP Mode Table 20 Menu AP Mode LINK TAB FUNCTION Wireless General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN LAN MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG4604 to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG4604 Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings Qos Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WPS Use this screen to configure WPS WPS Station Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS Scheduling Use this screen to schedule the times the Wireless LAN
304. vironment Temperature 309 C 709 C 229F 1589F Humidity 2096 9596 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 25 Product Specifications Table 75 Firmware Features FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default LAN IP Address 192 168 1 1 router 192 168 1 2 AP Default LAN Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default Password 1234 DHCP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 Wireless Interface Wireless LAN Default Wireless SSID ZyXEL Device Management Use the Web Configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the NBG4604 Wireless Functionality Allows IEEE 802 11b and or IEEE 802 11g wireless clients to connect to the NBG4604 wirelessly Enable wireless security WPA 2 PSK and or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network Note The NBG4604 may be prone to RF Radio Frequency interference from other 2 4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens wireless phones Bluetooth enabled devices and other wireless LANs Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the Web Configurator to put it on the NBG4604 Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the NBG4604 s configuration and put it back on the NBG4604 later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network mu
305. w to configure the wireless settings on your NBG4604 The instructions require that your hardware is connected see the Quick Start Guide and you are logged into the Web Configurator through your LAN connection see Section 3 3 on page 28 1 Open the Wireless LAN gt General screen in the NBG4604 s Web Configurator 2 Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected 3 Enter SSID Example3 as the SSID and select a channel 4 Set security mode to WPA PSK and enter ThisismyWPA PSKpre sharedkey in the Pre Shared Key field Click Apply Figure 32 Tutorial Network gt Wireless LAN gt General Wireless Setup Name SSID Hide SSID Channel Selection Operating Channel M Enable Wireless LAN SSID_Example3 Channel 06 2437MHz T Auto Channel Selection Channel 1 Channel Width auto 20 40 MHz Security Security Mode WPA PSK Pre Shared Key ThisismyvvP4 PSKpre sharedke ascit C Hex Group Key Update Timer fiso In Seconds Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled Apply Reset NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 5 Open the Status screen Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status Figure 33 Tutorial Status Screen E Refresh Interval None ivl Refresh Now Device Information System Status System Name ZyXEL8F4c System Up Time 0 1 56 F
306. way The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG4604 that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG4604 over the WAN the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes Modify Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen Modify a static route or create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen Click the Remove icon to delete a static route NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 15 Static Route 15 3 1 Static Route Setup Screen To edit a static route click the edit icon under Modify The following screen displays Fill in the required information for each static route Figure 84 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setup Static Route Setup Route Name Active IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric Destination IP Address Apply E Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 56 Management gt Static Route gt IP Static Route Static Route Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave this field blank to delete this static route Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to spec
307. wnload Disable 9 Enable p Q Prompt 3 Microsoft VM 3 Java permissions custom Osea 9 High safety Q Low safety m Reset custom settings j Reset to Medium Reset TN JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected NBG4604 User s Guide Appendix B Pop up Windows JavaScript and Java Permissions 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 138 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling E HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 2 EU daz L4 1 071 corp ores eee ae Use Java 2 1 4 1_0 for Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 for capleb requires esta requires restart ICrOSO m Java m enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Fa p Restore Defaults Apply NBG4604 User s Guide Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh
308. work Mode 802 11g gt Transmission Rate 18 Mbps Total Transmit 46 gt Security WPA PSK Total Receive 3 gt Channel 6 Link Quality 68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength eeee eee Link Quality 999099970066 If your connection is successful open your Internet browser and enter http www zyxel com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar If you are able to access the web site your wireless connection is successfully configured 6 3 Bandwidth Management for your Network This section shows you how to configure the bandwidth management feature on the NBG4604 to limit the bandwidth for specific kinds of outgoing traffic ZyXEL s bandwidth management feature allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application or subnet Use the Management gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Advanced screen to configure bandwidth management for your network 6 3 1 Configuring Bandwidth Management by Application For this example your company s customer support department wants to prioritize VoIP e mail and MSN Messenger services In the Priority Queue table VolP and e mail services are already pre defined However you still need to add MSN Messenger in the list refer to Section 6 3 2 on page 71 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials In the following screen you set the priorities for VolP and e mail Figure 38 Tutorial Priority Queue Priority Queue 1 Vv FTP Low gt
309. wser Set your device to Router Mode login see the Quick Start Guide for instructions and go to the Device I nformation table in the Status screen Your NBG4604 s IP address is available in the Device I nformation table f the DHCP setting under LAN information is None your device has a fixed IP address f the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client then your device receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network 3 If your NBG4604 is a DHCP client you can find your IP address from the DHCP server This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information 4 Reset your NBG4604 to change all settings back to their default This means your current settings are lost See Section 24 4 on page 205 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NBG4604 forgot the password 1 The default password is 1234 NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 24 Troubleshooting 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 24 4 on page 205 cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address Section 7 3 on page 102 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address
310. y free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it NBG4604 User s Guide 279 Appendix F Open Software Announcements A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is condi tioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License
311. y can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR POSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR COR RECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BELIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES O
312. y data encryption not enable any wireless security on your NBG4604 your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 44 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General No Security Wireless Setup Name SSID 1 Channel Selection Channel Width Security SSID Selection K Security Mode V Enable wireless LAN Enable Wireless LAN 1 M Operating Channel Channel 4 Enable Hide SSID Enable Intra BSS Traffic Q Note WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK can be configured when WPS enabled ZyXEL V Auto Channel Selection 20 MHz v ZyXEL M No Security v NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Network gt Wireless LAN gt General No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Choose No Security from the drop down list box Mode Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG4604 Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 4 2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key Your NBG4604 allows you to configure up to four 64 bit or 128 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled
313. y it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be dis tributed under the ter
314. y not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software Certain components of the Software and third party open source programs included with the Software have been or may be made available by ZyXEL listed in the below Table collec tively the Open Sourced Components You may modify or replace only these Open Sourced Components provided that you comply with the terms of this License and any applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open Sourced Components which have been provided on the License Notice as below for the Software ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance techni cal or other support for the resultant modified Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile trans late adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this License by applicable licensing terms governing use of the Open Sourced Components or by applicable law you may not market co brand private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any par
315. y wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user In the AP this feature is called a local user database or a local database In a RADIUS server this is a server used in businesses more than in homes If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E and F NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section 7 3 1 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption
316. you can choose depend on the type of user authentication See Section 7 3 1 3 on page 79 for information about this Table 23 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP t WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPAQ2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports For example suppose the AP does not have a local user database and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no user authentication Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network Note It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption IEEE 802 1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly Note It is not possible to use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database In this case it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database When you select WPA2
317. your NBG4604 s Internet access settings Click Network gt WAN The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose 8 4 1 Ethernet Encapsulation This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation Figure 60 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation Internet Connection ISP Parameters for Internet Access Connection Type Ethernet WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP C Use fixed IP Address IP Address p 0 00 IP Subnet Mask p 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address IE 0 0 0 DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP Second DNS Server From ISP WAN MAC Address c Factory default C Clone the computer s MAC address IP Address p 0 0 0 C Set WAN MAC Address fon 00 00 0000 00 Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTION Connection Type You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet WAN IP Address Assignment Get Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address This automatically is the default selection from ISP Use Fixed IP Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address Address NBG4604 User s Guide Chapter 8 WAN Table 38 Network WAN Internet Connection Ethernet Encapsulation LABEL DESCRIPTIO

Vendor Technical Guide Zyxel NBG4604

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents